JP6659945B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board that controls a game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command (effect control command) from the main control board. Among these, examples of the sub-control board include a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an illumination control board, and an acoustic control board. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the main control board executes a process for obtaining a random number, and based on the obtained random number, various pre-reading notice effects and an effect control command for an effect related to the jackpot lottery determination, The information is transmitted to the control board.
JP-A-2005-150332

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the type which transmits a command from the main control board to the sub-control board as described above, in order to perform various effect control, it is necessary to prepare various types of effect control commands. However, simply increasing the number of effect control commands may increase the processing load for command analysis on the sub-control board side and for determining effect patterns based on the analysis results.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing efficient control based on transmission and reception of commands.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides a main control unit (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of a game,
A sub-control unit (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control unit and performs a control process according to transmission information (such as an effect control command) transmitted from the main control unit;
Main control display means (main control display device or the like) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
A control start process for executing a control start process with power-on;
A game progress interruption process for executing a game progress interruption process for a game progress at a predetermined cycle, and
A predetermined random number (acceptance random number, symbol random number, etc.) is obtained based on that the game medium fired in the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined start area (such as a start port),
The random number includes at least a jackpot random number (such as a random number) for the jackpot lottery determination and a special symbol random number (such as a symbol random number) for determining a special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
Based on the jackpot random number, perform a jackpot lottery determination to determine whether it is a jackpot,
Based on the special symbol random number, perform a special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol,
Based on the results of the jackpot lottery determination and the special symbol lottery determination, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main control display means, and if the result of the jackpot lottery determination is a big hit, the special After the symbol stop display, perform a special game that is more advantageous to the player than usual,
If the start condition of the special symbol change display is not satisfied even when the game medium passes through the start area, special symbol holding storage information (first special symbol storage information) including at least the big hit random number and the special symbol random number Reservation storage information, second special figure reservation storage information, etc.) within a predetermined number (four, etc.),
In the game progress interruption process, at least
Starting area monitoring processing (starting port monitoring processing and the like) for monitoring the passage of game media in the starting area;
A symbol determination process for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed,
In the starting area monitoring process,
When the game medium passes through the starting area and the special symbol hold storage information is generated, predetermined notice information (a hit notice effect command, a symbol notice effect command, etc.) is created based on the generated special symbol hold storage information. And perform a process for storing (eg, random number storage process)
In the symbol determination process,
Predetermined symbol determination tables (special figure 1 big hit symbol tables 1-4, special figure 2 big hit symbol tables 1-4, small hit symbol tables 1-4, special figure 1 out of order) A process for the special symbol lottery determination by using a symbol determination value table, a special symbol 2 loss symbol determination value table, and the like,
If the result of the jackpot lottery determination is incorrect,
As a table for the symbol determination, a predetermined lost symbol determination value table (special figure 1 is a lost symbol determination value table of the special figure 1 and a special symbol 1 of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol determination value table, etc.) is used,
When the obtained special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined first deviation range (eg, 0 to 961 according to the special figure 1), the special symbol becomes a predetermined first deviation symbol (such as a nonstandard symbol). Determine the special symbol so that it becomes
When the acquired special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined second loss range (eg, 962 to 999 according to the special figure 1), the special symbol is changed to a predetermined second loss symbol. Make a decision,
The transmission information is configured by a combination of a numerical value that is predetermined first component information (such as MODE data) and a numerical value that is predetermined second component information (such as EVENT data),
The transmission information includes the notice information,
The announcement information includes jackpot announcement information (winning announcement effect command and the like) indicating announcement information related to the jackpot random number, and symbol announcement information (announcement announcement production command and the like) showing announcement information related to the special symbol random number. Including
The symbol notice information is created using a symbol notice determination value table (such as a hit symbol notice determination value table 1 in FIG. 31),
In the symbol notice determination value table, the relationship between the special symbol random number and the symbol notice information (the symbol random number range that can be obtained from the data value and the symbol notice associated with the random number comparison values 1 to 12) Relationship with the production command)
The second component element information in the symbol notice information is generated using the symbol notice determination value table, and a value range of the special symbol random number for selecting a part of the generated second component element information (such as in the range of 0026H defined by special symbol 1 failure symbol determination value random comparison value 2 of the table), the failure symbol the second out of range of the judgment value table (per symbol to be used in the symbol determination process Coincides with a range of values (such as a range of 38 numerical values corresponding to 0026H) belonging to a range of 0026H defined by the random number comparison value 12 of the notice determination value table 1;
The main control means, in the starting area monitoring processing, executes a notice effect determination processing for transmitting the symbol notice information to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means,
Receiving the design notice information, determining whether or not to perform a pre-production (such as a pre-reading production) using the received design notice information, and determining the type of the pre-production;
When the special symbol random number is a random number value for determining the second loss at the time of the symbol determination process in the main control means , the specific second determined in the preview effect determination process as the symbol preview information. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized by always executing the pre-production when component information is received.

  According to the present invention, a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing efficient control based on transmission and reception of commands can be provided.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the function of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a main board configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing basic functional means of a main board, a sub main board, and a sub-sub board. (A) is an explanatory view showing a main control display device, and (b) is a chart showing a relationship between each indicator lamp and a name in the main control display device. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a display on the effect display device when the effect symbol is changing, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect symbol while the effect is stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail judgment table, and (b) is a chart showing a change pattern table for out-of-place. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used at the time of a small hit. FIG. 3D is a chart showing a lost symbol determination table used at the time of a loss. (A) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of the first miss, (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of the second miss, (c) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used at the time of 16R big hit, (D) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of 4R big hit and small hit. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a control start process in the main board. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a control start process following FIG. 11. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interruption process in a main board. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off process in a main board. (A) is a chart showing an initial value random number update table, and (b) is a chart showing an initial value update type random number update table. (A) is a chart showing a hit notice command, a symbol notice command, and a change notice command, and (b) is a chart showing a part of the RWM work area. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting-port monitoring process. 19 is a flowchart showing a start-up port monitoring process following FIG. 18. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement pending ball number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a selection number acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows 1 byte selection number acquisition processing. It is a chart showing various tables, such as a start-up opening 1 monitoring table. It is a chart showing various tables, such as a special figure 1 change start monitoring table. It is a chart showing various tables, such as special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2. It is a table | surface which shows various tables, such as a special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3. It is a table | surface which shows various tables, such as a small hit symbol table 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a main part according to another embodiment of the control start processing in the main board. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power-off confirmation information setting process on a main board. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power-off required time on a main board.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then, the game procedure, effects, control modes, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among them, the game board 50 has different components such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

  In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, a so-called model change in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models becomes possible. I have. In the following, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The above-described gaming machine frame 11 has an outer frame 12, a front frame 13, and a lower front plate 14. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used to fix the pachinko gaming machine 10 at a predetermined position in island facilities in a game arcade (game store), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 have an opening part whose front side is closed.

  In addition, nailing is generally performed as a method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Wood is used as a material of at least a portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. In addition, as a method of installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, a method other than nailing may be employed.

  The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape matching the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks, thereby returning to the closed state. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 covers a portion between the upper and lower portions of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder 17 of the lock device is disposed on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder 17 is provided with the above-mentioned plate unit covering the lower portion of the front frame 13. Through 16, the keyhole is directed forward of the pachinko gaming machine 10. When the game shop clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

  The above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13 with respect to the front frame 13 and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always covers the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 arranged at the front of the front frame 13 are mounted on the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently of each other with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game room clerk swinging forward and horizontally, and swinging horizontally horizontally from the open state and locked to the front frame 13. This results in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-described locking device (not shown). That is, when a game store clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the above-described cylinder 17 and turns the key clockwise, for example, in the opposite direction to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. , And the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed in parallel with the front frame 13, so that the locking device is operated, and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. Lock to frame 13.

  When the glass door 15 is opened, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable, and an operating unit (not shown) of the locking mechanism is operated by a game arcade clerk, for example, in a downward direction. By performing the pushing operation, the plate unit 16 is opened. Further, the plate unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the plate unit 16 is pushed in parallel with the front frame 13, so that the locking mechanism is activated, and the plate unit 16 is moved again. Lock to front frame 13.

  Further, the glass door 15, for example, detachably holds two parallel transparent plates, and when in a closed state, allows the game board 50 to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. Like that. As the transparent plate, besides a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. By opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held on the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage and the like for guiding and collecting game balls as game media.

  The dish unit 16 has an upper bowl 18, a lower bowl 19, a firing handle 20, and the like on its front surface. Among them, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated through the firing handle 20, and plays the lower ball plate 19. Mechanisms for various functions, such as ball ejection, are provided. The lower ball tray 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (a so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as ejection are provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corner of the glass door 15 and the lower front plate 14, and the like, and through these speakers 21, a game state, an effect pattern, and the like are provided. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on a portion of the upper bowl 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on an outer wall surface above the upper bowl 18 and is located near the center of the upper bowl 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 includes an operation button light emitter (not shown) inside, and outputs light according to the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be protruded upward in a predetermined case using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown, a cross key is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and various environment settings can be made by the player using the cross key. Examples of the contents of the environment setting include adjustment of the volume of the speaker 21, adjustment of the brightness and light amount of the effect display described later, and change of the effect mode described later. Further, it is possible to provide a display capable of performing an effect related to a game and displaying the above-described environment setting, for example, on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11.
<Back view of pachinko machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the front frame 13, a set base 31 having a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting game balls is attached, and below the set base 31, a gaming machine is provided. A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the whole, and a payout control board 103 for controlling the gaming machine frame side are attached. On the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 for controlling the whole game and a sub-board 104 for executing effect control based on a control command from the main board 102 are provided on the set board 31. Are provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the openings.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island facility and serving as prize balls. Further, below the winning ball tank 33, a winning ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a winning ball discharging passage 36 are provided. The award ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the award ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the gaming board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Have been.

  The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the payout unit 35 can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowing down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as prize balls.

  The power supply unit 32 is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub-board 104, and the like. The power supply unit 32 is provided with a power switch 40 that is a tilt switch. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the power switch 40 is pressed downward from the center and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball does not turn off even when hit directly.

  The payout control board 103 is disposed at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in response to a command related to payout from the main board 102 or a lending request from the outside. The payout control board 103 also has a firing control function of controlling the firing device 43 so as to fire the game ball into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the firing handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

  The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged at the lower center part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly includes various lottery functions and control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, etc. 10 has a central processing function. The sub-substrate 104 described above is arranged at the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

The main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the sub-board 104 constitute a game control device, and details thereof will be described later. As for the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in the present embodiment) having a main function of effect control and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation. In the example, it is divided into a sub-sub-substrate 302), but the term "sub-substrate" includes these. The details of the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 will also be described later. An external relay terminal board 46 for relaying a signal from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like to a device outside the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided at an upper right portion on the back side of the set base 31.
<Game board composition>

  Next, the game board 50 and components (board components) arranged on the board of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of components made of a transparent resin material (for example, a transparent acrylic resin). The game board 50 is formed in a hollow plate shape, and has therein a game ball passage for guiding game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board components described later are mounted facing forward, and is closed by the glass door 15 and the like. , The front of which is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining an inner rail and an outer rail formed into a curved belt shape, and the game area 52 is formed through a transparent plate of the glass door 15. It is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, in the game area 52, a first starting winning opening 62 and a second starting winning opening 63 which are two starting winning openings, and a first starting winning opening 63 which is also two big winning openings. A large winning port 91 and a second large winning port 92, a left operating port 68a and a right operating port 68b, which are also two operating ports, a plurality of general winning ports 72, and an out port 58 are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for an effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

  The first start winning opening 62 described above is arranged at the lower center of the game area 52, and the second starting winning opening 63 is arranged below the first start winning opening 62. Further, the first big winning opening 91 is disposed below the second starting winning opening 63 and is located above the out opening 58. The second big winning opening 92 is located at the lower right of the game area 52 and is located at the upper right of the out opening 58. Further, the left operating port 68a is disposed at the upper left of the game area 52, and the right operating port 68b is disposed obliquely to the upper right of the second special winning opening 92.

  The general winning opening 72 is disposed on the left side of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63, and the out opening 58 is located below the first winning opening 91 in the game area. 52 is arranged in the lowermost region. Furthermore, the center decoration 64 has a size that occupies most of the area above the center of the game area 52 and is arranged at a position displaced to the right somewhat from the center of the game area 52 in the left-right direction. Have been. The effect display device 60 is arranged behind the transparent game board 50, and the display area 194 can be visually recognized through the game board 50 from the center opening of the center decoration 64.

In the game area 52, a number of game nails (not shown) and mechanisms such as windmills are provided. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided on the outside of the game board 50 at the lower left of the game area 52. The specific configuration and functions of the main control display device 53 will be described later. In addition, the above-described board surface configuration of the game board 50 can be variously changed in accordance with, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko game machine 10. Other embodiments relating to the board configuration will be described later.
<Functions of panel parts>

  Subsequently, specific functions and configurations relating to the individual panel components described above will be described. First, the first starting winning opening 62 described above is a starting winning opening relating to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, the first start winning opening 62 is provided with a first start winning detection device 74 as shown in FIG. The first start winning detection device 74 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first start winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102 described above. . Then, the first start winning detection device 74 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball.

  The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening relating to the second game, and is disposed immediately below the first start winning opening 62. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 63 is normally prevented by the first starting winning opening 62. However, the second start winning opening 63 is an ordinary electric accessory (a so-called “electric tulip” or “electric tuy”), and is a blade that opens when a normal symbol to be described later is stopped and displayed in a hit manner. (Symbol omitted). Here, in the following, the blade of the second start winning opening 63 is referred to as “opening / closing blade”. Then, the second start winning opening 63 is opened by opening and closing the opening / closing wings for a predetermined time, so that game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. In this way, the opening of the second start winning opening 63 to enable a ball to be entered is also called a so-called “Den Chu support” or “Den support”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second start winning detection device 75 and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening and closing blade. The second start winning detection device 75 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second start winning opening 63, and the output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102. Then, the second start winning detection device 75 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball.

  In this embodiment, when the opening and closing blades are expanded, the ease of entering the second start winning opening 63 becomes higher than the ease of entering the first starting winning opening 62. However, the relationship between the ease of entry at the first start winning opening 62 and the second start winning opening 63 should be appropriately set according to circumstances such as profits based on the results of the first game and the second game. Is possible. For example, when the opening and closing blades of the second start winning opening 63 are not expanded, no ball is thrown at all, or by opening and closing the opening and closing blades, the first start winning opening 62 and the second start are opened. For example, it is possible to make the entrance easiness of the winning opening 63 approximately equal.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second start winning opening 63. These open modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short open" or "short open") and a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). Modes (referred to as “long open” or “long open”). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode set to an opening time between the short opening and the long opening. Various opening modes related to the second start winning opening 63 will be described later.

  The above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detecting device 73 for detecting the entering of a game ball, as shown in FIG. The general winning detection device 73 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 72, and an output signal thereof is input to the main board 102. Then, the general winning detection device 73 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball. The general winning detection device 73 may be provided individually for the general winning opening 72, or one general winning detecting device 73 may be shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72.

  When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls having entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are gathered at a position where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged, and detected. It is possible to Further, the plurality of general winning openings 72 can be grouped for each positional relationship, and the general winning detecting device 73 can be shared for each group. Further, when the number of prize balls to be paid out is different for a plurality of general prize ports 72, the general prize ports 72 can be grouped for each prize ball number. It should be noted that a specific mode relating to the payout of prize balls will be described later.

  The above-mentioned first special winning opening 91 is provided as a special winning opening corresponding to the first game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the first special winning opening 91 includes a first opening / closing door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-described opening. Then, the first special winning opening 91 performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode when a predetermined hit occurs in the first game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the first big winning opening 91 is a first big winning detection device 78 for detecting the entering of a game ball, and a first big winning opening and closing drive of the above-mentioned first opening and closing door. A winning opening solenoid 80 is provided. Among them, the first special winning detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first special winning opening 91, and an output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

  The above-mentioned second special winning opening 92 is provided as a special winning opening corresponding to the second game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the second big winning opening 92 is provided with a second opening / closing door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs in the second game, the second special winning opening 92 performs an opening operation in a predetermined mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second large winning opening 92 is a second large winning detection device 79 for detecting the entering of a game ball, and a second large winning opening for driving the above-mentioned second opening / closing door. A winning opening solenoid 81 is provided. Among them, the second special winning detection device 79 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first special winning opening 91, and an output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

  In this embodiment, decorative plates 91b and 92b are provided in front of the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92, respectively. The decorative plates 91b and 92b are made of a transparent material so that a player can visually recognize the first opening / closing door, the second opening / closing door, the first winning opening 91, and the second winning opening 92. However, the decorative plates 91b and 92b may be opaque. In addition, characters and figures for decorating the game area 52 may be drawn on each decorative plate. In this case, characters and figures are also provided in the first and second large winning openings 91 and 92. It is desirable that the distance does not hinder the visual recognition of the entered game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the left operating port 68a has a left passage detecting device 69a, and the right operating port 68b has a right passage detecting device 69b. Further, these passage detecting devices 69a and 69b have sensors for detecting the passage of the game balls at the corresponding operating ports 68a and 68b. The output signals of the sensors in the passage detection devices 69a and 69b are input to the main board 102, and the passage detection devices 69a and 69b change the output signals of the sensors according to the presence or absence of a ball.

  The above-described center decoration 64 has an effect function and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED board on which a number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED transmits through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration.

  The center decoration 64 is provided with movable effect members 93 and 94 and the like, and these movable effect members 93 and 94 constitute a gimmick for effect. Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed at the right side of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of a flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-described effect function. Have. The effect display device 60 is provided behind the center decoration 64, and the display screen of the effect display device 60 can be visually recognized through the center decoration 64 at substantially the center of the game area 52.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 has a large number of 7-segment display units and LED indicators arranged on a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256. The main control display device 53 includes a normal symbol display section 59 for displaying the above-mentioned ordinary symbols, a first special symbol display section 70 for displaying a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. And a second special symbol display section 71 for displaying a second special symbol (described later) corresponding to, and various other display sections. Note that the above-described ordinary symbol display section 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. The first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device. The details of each display unit formed on the main control display device 53 will be described later.

Also, in the following, a normal symbol is a "normal symbol", a special symbol is a "special symbol", a first special symbol is a "first special symbol" or "special symbol 1," and a second special symbol is a "second special symbol." Or "Tokuzu 2". Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".
<Basic game procedure>

  Subsequently, a game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where a game ball is supplied to the above-described upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-described firing handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 has an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. Game balls are fired at predetermined intervals one by one. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

  In a normal game, the player fires so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52 and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located at the lower central portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of firing mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called so-called left-handed. The firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the above-described firing device 43 while the player operates the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously discharged into the game area 52 drop in a direction corresponding to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or the reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like.

  When a game ball falls into any of various winning ports such as the above-described general winning port 72 and the first starting winning port 62, the incoming ball is detected as described later, and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 in accordance with the type of the winning port that has entered the ball. When the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid out subsequent game balls cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. .

  Further, the game balls dropped into various winning holes become safe balls, and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port 58, and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball reaching the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the above-mentioned island facility side. Is discharged.

  The above-mentioned left operating port 68a and right operating port 68b are gates through which game balls pass, unlike the above-mentioned winning ports that generate safe balls. In the following, the “winning opening” including the left operating opening 68a and the right operating opening 68b will be referred to as “winning opening”. It shall have meaning.

  When the game ball enters the operating port (here, the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b), the main control is performed if a predetermined variation start condition (general-purpose variation start condition) described later is satisfied. On the display device 53, an ordinary symbol (described later) is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (general figure lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operating port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. You. If the result of the general drawing lottery is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning mode, and if the result of the general figure lottery is a non-match, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-matching mode. You. The details of the regular drawing lottery and ordinary symbols will be described later.

  When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined change start condition (special figure change start condition) described later is satisfied. For example, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on a ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. . When the result of the random number lottery is a big hit, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, and when the result of the random number lottery is a non-match, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-matching mode.

  The details of the jackpot lottery and special symbols will be described later. In addition, when a ball is entered in the starting opening (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), it is possible to output a specific sound effect, illuminate the starting opening, and the like. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, an effect display relating to a special symbol is performed. This effect display differs in whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or in a stop display, or in the difference that the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an out of order. In connection therewith, effects of various predetermined modes are performed. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not correct, the display on the main control display device 53 shifts from the stop display of the special symbol to the variable display related to the next lottery result. Further, the effect performed by the effect display device 60 is also related to the next lottery result after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, after a special symbol stop display or an effect display related to the jackpot, a special game which is a game state more advantageous to the player than a normal game (normal game) Move to In this special game, the above-mentioned special winning opening (the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92) is opened and closed. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs based on the ball entering the first starting winning opening 62, the first big winning opening 91 opens and closes, and a big hit occurs based on the entering ball into the second starting winning opening 63. In this case, the second special winning opening 92 opens and closes.

  In the special game, a unit game in which the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92 is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Further, the special game includes a type in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and a type in which a unit game is repeated a number of times smaller than the maximum number. The maximum number of times can be exemplified by 16 times (16R (round)), and the number of times smaller than the maximum number of times can be exemplified by 4 times (4R).

  In the present embodiment, the types of such special games correspond to the types of big hits, but specific types of big hits will be described later. In each unit game, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls is detected in the corresponding special winning opening (the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92), or the unit is opened. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, the end condition is satisfied, and the corresponding special winning opening is closed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game characteristic in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the first type pachinko gaming machines in the related art is adopted. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above are divided into a first game using the left operating port 68a, the first start winning port 62, the first large winning port 91, a right operating port 68b, and the second starting port. It can be divided into a winning game 63 and a second game in which the second big winning game 92 is used. The second game is prioritized (priority control) over the first game, and the first game and the second game are not executed at the same time. Here, details of the game characteristics in which the second game has priority over the first game will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the present embodiment, as specific games, probability variation games (hereinafter referred to as “probable changes”), fluctuation time reduction games (hereinafter referred to as “time savings”), and ball entry facilitation games are provided. Further, in the present embodiment, during the specific game, a so-called right strike in which the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area 52 is performed. The details of these specific games will be described later.

  When the specific game is executed, an effect for prompting right-handing is executed by the image and sound of the effect display device 60. When the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and fires the game ball toward the right area of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is , Enters the game ball passage 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game balls released from the center decoration 64 fall in a direction according to how they hit while hitting a plurality of game nails or other structures.

  Some of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 pass through the right operating port 68b (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the right passage detecting device 69b (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the right operating port 68b, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A) for a predetermined time, and the variably displayed ordinary symbol is displayed. When the vehicle stops in a predetermined hit mode, the ordinary electric accessory in the second start winning opening 63 expands for a predetermined time, and the electric chew support during the specific game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 can be guided around the second starting winning opening 63 or the second big winning opening 92 with a nail or the like. When the ordinary electric accessory in the winning opening 63 is opened once, in many cases one game ball or, depending on the circumstances, a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. . Further, in this embodiment, a time reduction is added during the specific game, and during the time reduction, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is extended and the long opening described above is executed.

  Further, as described above, since the second special winning opening 92 is arranged on the right side of the game area 52, even when a big hit related to the second game occurs and the second special winning opening 92 is opened, the player is not disturbed. It is necessary to perform the above-mentioned right-handing aiming at the second big winning opening 92.

  In addition, when a special game related to the first game is executed after a big hit of the first game occurs, the first special winning opening 91 is opened, but during the special game related to the first game, the player To the right. Then, in this case, before starting the special game relating to the first game, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to make a right-hand by using the image and sound of the effect display device 60. Further, it is also possible to adopt a board configuration for guiding a right-hit game ball to the first special winning opening 91, or a board configuration in which the first special winning opening 91 is arranged on the right side of the game area 52. Further, it is also possible to integrate the first special winning opening 91 with the second special winning opening 92 and adopt a board configuration in which the special winning opening is only the second special winning opening 92.

Further, the game ball passage portion 65 through which the right-hit game balls flow down may not be provided in the center decoration 64, but may be secured, for example, on the right outside of the center decoration 64. In this case, at the time of right-handing, the game ball passes through the right outside of the center decoration 64 and goes to the area where the right operating port 68b and the second big winning port 92 are arranged. It is also possible to adopt a board configuration in which the game ball passage 65 in the center decoration 64 and the game ball flow path formed on the right outside of the center decoration 64 coexist.
<Type of jackpot>

  Next, the types of big hits in the first game and the second game will be described. First, in this embodiment, a jackpot in which the above-mentioned unit game is repeated 16 times (hereinafter, also referred to as “16R jackpot” as appropriate) or a jackpot in which the unit game is repeated four times (hereinafter, also referred to as “4R jackpot” as appropriate) is a big hit. Is provided. In addition, the lottery mode of these big hits will be described later.

  The above-mentioned unit game is started with the opening of the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) in the special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or when the first big winning The game ends when a predetermined number (for example, nine or more) of game balls drop into the winning opening 91 (or the second winning opening 92), and the first winning opening 91 (or the second winning opening 92) is closed. I do. The special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called out-of-ball game for the purpose of causing a player to acquire a game ball. Furthermore, among the various jackpots, the 16R jackpot, the 4R jackpot, and the like are intended to cause the player to acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide, as a part of the big hit, for example, a 16R big hit or a part of the 16R big hit that does not change (16R normal or 4R normal). In addition, for example, even if it is a 16R jackpot, the opening period of the first big winning port 91 (or the second big winning port 92) is short, and only the same degree of pitching as the 4R jackpot can be obtained (16R jackpot). It is possible to provide a probability change (actual 4R) or to provide a player who can hardly obtain a pitch even with a 4R hit (no 4R pitch).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific game state such as the probability change and the time saving is generated for all 16R big hits and some 4R big hits. That is, all of the 16R jackpots in the present embodiment are 16R jackpots with a probability change (hereinafter referred to as “16R probability change”). Further, the 4R jackpot in the present embodiment includes a 4R jackpot with a probability change (hereinafter, referred to as “4R probability change”) and a 4R jackpot without a probability change (hereinafter, “4R normal”).

However, the combination of the jackpot, the probability change, the time saving, and the like are not limited to those of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, it is possible to provide a jackpot that does not provide at least one copy among privilege functions such as a probability change, a time reduction, and a game for facilitating entering a ball. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a reduction in time. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the type of jackpot different depending on the difference in the duration of the probable change or the difference in the duration of the time reduction. In addition, when the power saving support is also performed during the working hours, the “time saving duration” can be rephrased as the “power saving support duration”. Further, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chew support.
<Hits other than big hits>

In this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a hit type other than the big hit. In the first game (or the second game), when this small hit occurs, the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is opened once. In addition, the lottery mode of the small hit will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of Main Control Display Device >>

  Next, the main control display device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 is configured by arranging a segment display and a large number of LED indicators on a design display substrate 256, and stacking a transparent plate in front of various displays. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 includes a first status indicator light 231 and a second status indicator light 232 in the upper left part of the symbol display board 256 when viewed from the front, in order from the left. , A main control error indicator light 233.

  The first status indicator light 231 is configured by arranging two linear LED segments in a line upward and to the right to form a digit in the form of a numeral “1”. The second status indicator 232 is a combination of seven linear LED segments to form a digit in the form of the numeral “8”. Further, the main control error indicator light 233 is formed by a perfect circle main control error indicator light dot provided at the lower right of the second status indicator light 232.

  The above-mentioned first status indicator 231 and second status indicator 232 can display numbers 0 to 18, alphabet characters, hyphens and other symbols by selectively turning on the LEDs of each segment. Has become. Further, by blinking the LED and different blinking patterns, it is possible to display more various information. The first state indicator 231 and the second state indicator 232 are used, for example, to display the number of rounds when a special game is executed when a big hit occurs in the first game or the second game. . The main control error indicator 233 can be used, for example, for displaying an error.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, on the symbol display substrate 256, two, four, ten, and ten LED indicators are arranged side by side at a predetermined pitch in order from the top. A total of 26 LED indicators on the symbol display board 256 correspond to the remaining portions of the symbol display substrate 256 with respect to the portion where the first status indicator 231, the second status indicator 232, and the main control error indicator 233 are arranged. And are arranged in order. Here, in FIG. 6 (a), for convenience of explanation, reference numerals A to Z are described on a total of 26 LED indicator lamps. In the following description, the LED indicators may be distinguished from each other by reference numerals A to Z given in FIG.

  These LED indicators A to Z can also display predetermined information in accordance with the presence / absence of lighting and the blinking pattern. FIG. 6B shows the relationship between the LED indicator lights AZ shown in FIG. 6A and the names. Among these, the LED indicator lights A to C are a first LED for ordinary symbol storage display, a second LED for ordinary symbol storage display, and an ordinary symbol display LED for an ordinary symbol to be described later. The LED indicators D and E are a third status indicator and a fourth status indicator, respectively, and the LED indicator F is a right-turn indicator that turns on, for example, when the above-described right-turn should be performed. Of these, the third state indicator (D) is used to display the operating state of the probability variation function related to the special symbol, and the fourth state indicator (E) is used to display the operating state of the probability variation function related to the ordinary symbol. Used to display

  Further, eight of the LED indicator lights G to N constitute a first special symbol display unit 70, and the LED indicator lights O and P are respectively a first LED for first special symbol storage display and a first special symbol memory. It is a second LED for display. In addition, eight of the LED indicator lights Q to X constitute a second special symbol display part 71, and the LED indicator lights Y and Z are respectively a first LED for second special symbol storage display and a second special symbol memory. It is a second LED for display. In FIG. 6A, in order to attach symbols to the ordinary symbol display section 59, the first special symbol display section 70, and the second special symbol display section 71, the respective LED indicator lamps are enclosed by curly bracket symbols. Is shown.

  The above-described ordinary symbol display section 59 is constituted by one LED indicator light C, and performs a variation display and a stop display of the ordinary symbol by the operation mode of the LED indicator light C. In addition, as the operation of the normal symbol display section 59, it is possible to distinguish and display a large number (for example, three or more) types of information by a difference in lighting and blinking, a difference in blinking cycle, and the like. In addition, from the viewpoint of clarity related to the stop display of the ordinary symbol, it is desirable to display the lottery result of the ordinary symbol by turning on or off. For this reason, the number of the LED indicator lamps constituting the ordinary symbol display section 59 may be, for example, two or more, and the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol may be represented by a combination of turning on and off.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed by blinking of one LED display lamp C. However, for example, when the normal symbol display section is configured by two LED indicator lights, one LED is turned on and the other LED is turned off (represented by “●”), and one LED is turned off and the other LED is turned off. (Represented by "○ ●") alternately flashes as "● ○", "○ ●", "● ○", "○ ●", .... It is possible to do. The display mode of a normal symbol using two LEDs will be described later as another embodiment. Further, in the case of such blinking by alternate lighting of two patterns, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation depending on the timing (interval) of the pattern switching, and therefore, “○ (all unlit)”, “● (all lit)” May be displayed in three or four patterns. However, if "●●" is sandwiched, it is conceivable that the influence of the afterglow is likely to occur, and the fluctuation may be difficult to recognize. Therefore, three patterns in which only the pattern of "○○" is added are preferable.

  The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of performing the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game by the operation mode of the eight LED indicators G to N arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. Has become. The first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to a result of a first lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting winning opening 62, and a variable display thereof is predetermined. When the game is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display unit 70 has a maximum of 256 (= 2 ＾ 8) types depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED indicators G to N. The identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly, the above-mentioned second special symbol display section 71 also has a variation display and a stop display of the second special symbol according to the second game by operating modes of the eight LED indicators Q to X arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. Is possible. The second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display section 71 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 63, and the variable display thereof is a predetermined symbol. When stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In the second special symbol display section 71, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a maximum of 256 (= 2 種類 8) types are provided depending on the combination of turning on and off the LED indicators Q to X. Can be displayed.

The main control display device 53 having such a configuration is connected to the above-described main board 102 as shown in FIG. Various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In addition, in FIG. 3, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the ordinary symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

  When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned operation port (the left operation port 68a or the right operation port 68b), the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and the normal symbol change display is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the form of a loss (a loss mode), after a predetermined stop time (fixed time of a general figure stop) elapses, if there is a ball in the subsequent operation port, the normal The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the normal symbol previously stopped and displayed is displayed. According to the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  Further, the first LED for ordinary symbol storage display and the second LED for ordinary symbol storage display, which are the LED indicator lights A and B, are one set of two LEDs. The numerical value of 4 can be displayed. And the numerical value displayed by the 1st LED (C) for normal symbol storage display and the 2nd LED (D) for normal symbol storage display represents the number of hold | maintenance related to the general symbol lottery in a 1st game or a 2nd game. .

  The number of reserves related to this general drawing lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the left operating port 68a (or the right operating port 68b) during the normal symbol change, and the normal symbol for which the normal symbol change display has not yet been executed. Shows the number of lotteries. That is, if the previously performed symbol change is not completed, the change start condition is not satisfied. If the symbol change is completed, the change start condition is satisfied, and the lottery result stored and stored ( Based on the hold lottery result), a new symbol change is started. The upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and the storage of the number of reservations does not exceed four.

  The display of the numerical value of 0 to 4 by the first LED for normal symbol storage display (C) and the second LED for normal symbol storage display (D) is, for example, both extinguished when the number of hold is 0 (no hold). However, when the number of reservations is 1, it is possible to turn on one and turn off the other. When the number of reservations is 2, both of them are turned on, when the number of reservations is 3, one of them is turned on and the other is blinked, and when the number of reservations is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed. In addition, if the number of LEDs for displaying the reserved number of ordinary drawings (the same applies to the display of the reserved number of special figures described later) is set to the same number as the upper limit number of the reserved (here, four), control such as blinking is unnecessary. . However, as in the present embodiment, by setting the number of LEDs for displaying the reserved number to be less than the reserved upper limit number (here, two), the member cost is reduced, and the blinking control is further performed. Since the light-off period is provided, power consumption can be suppressed.

  Regarding the display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol display unit 70, two LEDs, a first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and a first special symbol memory display second LED (P), are provided. Is set as one set, and numerical values of 0 to 4 are displayed. Regarding the display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the second special symbol display unit 71, the first LED (Y) for the second special symbol storage display and the second LED (Z) for the second special symbol storage display are set to one. This is performed by displaying numerical values of 0 to 4 as a set.

  In the present embodiment, since the second game is executed with priority as described above, for the first special symbol, all the symbol changes corresponding to the result of the reserved lottery of the second special symbol are finished, and the result of the retained lottery result Is also a condition for starting the change of the first special symbol. The upper limit of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four each, and the number of holdings in each of them is not more than four.

  The first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and the first special symbol memory display second LED (P), or the second special symbol memory display first LED (Y) and the second special symbol memory display second LED The display of the numerical values of 0 to 4 by (Z) is, for example, similar to the case of the above-mentioned first LED for ordinary symbol storage display (A) and the second LED for ordinary symbol storage display (B), and the number of reserved items is 0. In this case (if no hold is made), both can be turned off, and if the number of holds is 1, one of them is turned on and the other is turned off. When the number of reservations is 2, both of them are turned on, when the number of reservations is 3, one of them is turned on and the other is blinked, and when the number of reservations is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

In the case where the above-mentioned gaming state in which the right-hand operation is to be performed is performed, the display is performed in a predetermined mode using the right-hand instruction light F of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). In the present embodiment, the operation pattern of the right-handed indicator light F is such that the right-handed indicator light F is turned off when the game state to be left-handed is left-handed and is turned on when the game condition to be right-handed is right-handed. For example, lighting or blinking) is set.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15-inch) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, another effect display such as an effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 or a story display is performed. In the effect display device 60, various images are displayed. Here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b). The variable display of the symbol 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 includes a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c.

  Further, in this embodiment, the left effect symbol 190a has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “9”. Further, the middle effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, which are the other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols meaning numbers “1” to “9”, like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above element design will be described later.

  Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scroll), and the above-described element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by

  The effect symbol 190 may form a so-called “reach” combination in the middle of the variable display. In the “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are symbols having the same numbers such as “7” and “7”, and have the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is constituted by symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach is in a state where the combination cannot be constituted with another effect symbol. Has become.

  In addition, as a display mode of the effect symbol 190, various types of “reach” and other various modes can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and details thereof will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another type of display such as a mechanical drum or an LED display is used. It may be something. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the main control display device 53 which is a display device different from the effect display device 60. A special symbol may be displayed on the effect display device 60 without displaying the symbol. In this case, it is possible to give the special symbol itself a directing role.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 in the effect display device 60 is shared by the first game and the second game. For this reason, a display may be made to indicate which of the special symbols of the first game and the second game the current effect symbol 190 is displaying. Such a display for discriminating between the first game and the second game is performed, for example, at any corner or the like of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, or for distinguishing the center decoration 64 described above. It is conceivable to add an LED indicator light and to display an identification sign related to the distinction between the first game and the second game. In addition, the effect symbols for the first game and the effect symbols for the second game may be separately provided, and both the effect symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 60 at the same time.

  Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies. More specifically, as described above, the effect display device 60 shown in FIG. 1 uses a relatively large display screen (for example, one having a size of about 15 inches) and a relatively small display screen. It is conceivable to add one or more (for example, one having a size of about 5 inches). Here, a large display may be referred to as, for example, a "main display" or "main liquid crystal", and a small display may be referred to, for example, as a "sub-display" or "sub-liquid crystal".

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member, and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In such a case, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.

  Further, the additional display may have a multi-monitor function, and a combined image may be formed by combining the display content of the display area 194 with the display content of the additional display. It is also possible to combine additional display bodies in front of the display area 194 to separately form one display body in a pseudo manner. Further, when an additional display body is arranged in front of the display area 194, the display contents of the display area 194 hidden by the additional display body can be displayed on the additional display body to make up. is there.

In addition, a relatively large display body may be movable, for example, back and forth. Further, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display device is arranged in front of the effect display device 60, and when a predetermined effect pattern is executed, the display content of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is superimposed on the display content of the effect display device 60. It is also possible.
<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub main board 301, and the like. The above-described payout control board 103 and the like are connected to the power supply board 251 among these, and the payout control board 103 includes a main board 102, a launching device 43, and a game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown). ) Etc. are connected. The main control display device 53 and the sub-main board 301 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub-sub board 302 is connected to the sub-main board 301.

  The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). Although not shown, the payout control board 103 is also connected to a status display unit used for displaying an error type, a card unit for executing money processing and ball lending processing for ball lending, and the like. . Further, a ball operation board or the like used for ball operation is connected to the above-described game ball rental device connection terminal plate (not shown). Further, a touch switch (not shown), a firing stop switch (not shown), and the like provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIG. 1) are connected to the above-described firing device 43.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control display device 53, each of the passage detection devices 69a and 69b, a normal electric accessory solenoid 76, Start winning detecting device 74, second starting winning detecting device 75, general winning detecting device 73, first big winning detecting device 78, second big winning detecting device 79, first big winning opening solenoid 80, second big winning opening solenoid. 81, a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor (not shown), and the like.

  Each device for effect is connected to the sub main board 301 via various relay boards not shown. Examples of the equipment for production include an LED board for various decorations in the center decoration 64, various movable motors of the movable production members 93 and 94, an LED board for decoration in the game machine frame 11, and a game machine frame 11. An example is a frame motor for effect provided. Here, in addition to the illumination performed on the glass door 15, the illumination performed on the dish unit 16, the illumination performed on the button device provided with the operation button 22, and the like can be exemplified as the illumination on the gaming machine frame 11. . The above-mentioned frame motor is used for driving a movable effect member (not shown) provided in the game machine frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal unit 42 provided in the above-described effect display device 60, various speakers 21, and the like are connected to the sub-sub substrate 302. The various speakers 21 may be connected to the above-described sub main board 301.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, on the main board 102, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) with resin packaging can be used. Note that the “ROM” and “RWM” described in the present embodiment are of a general concept including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Although not shown, the CPU device mounted on the main board 102 includes, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number. And a random number circuit. Among these, the random number circuit for the 16-bit random number and the random number circuit for the 8-bit random number are for generating a hardware random number which is a built-in random number.

  Further, the main board 102 is provided with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from a device external to the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit sections such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

  The above-mentioned ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, when the CPU 501 executes the game program, the RWM 503 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the processes, and the like.

  Subsequently, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) with resin packaging can be used. In addition, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout processing, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501, the RWM 513 rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the processes, and the like.

  The above-described sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main board 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on an effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main substrate 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes the various programs. Memory.

  The transmission and reception of data between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 are performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since one-way communication is maintained between the main board 102 and the sub main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to on the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301. In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restricting unit (such as a buffer circuit) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub main board 301 is performed by the communication restricting unit. It is possible to do via

  The above-described sub-sub board 302 includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a sound ROM 534, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, a sound control circuit 537, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). It has. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub main board 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 60, and rewrites the content of the image data in the video memory 540 to display the content (frame image) of the effect display device 60. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timing of each of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Then, the effects are displayed on the effect display device 60 with the symbols superimposed in the order of the layers in which the priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The power supply board 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like via a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, and the like to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, And supply to other predetermined devices.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 provides an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by a game shop manager. Is provided. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) stored data even when power supply to the power supply board is cut off. When the initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is restored. Cleared.

  The initialization switch 544 is divided into a switch for the main board 102 and a switch for the payout control board 103 so that the backed-up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. It may be. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at power-on, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

  As described above, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 to the RWM 503 in the main board 102 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is shut off, so that the data can be held (backed up). That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 503a is provided with a stack pointer at the time of power interruption when a power interruption (including a so-called momentary interruption caused by an instantaneous voltage drop) or the like occurs. , An area for storing values of registers, I / O, and the like. Then, with the normal power-on and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information of the backup area 503a.

  Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when power is turned off by a power-off process (described later), and restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is executed in a control start process (to be described later) when the power is turned on. As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

  Also, as with the RWM 503 of the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 to the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that data can be held (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 513a stores a stack pointer at the time of power interruption, values of registers, I / O, and the like when the power is interrupted due to a power failure or the like (when a power interruption occurs). Area. Then, with the normal power-up or the elimination of the power failure, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area 513a.

  The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power cutoff processing in the payout control board 103, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the control start processing in the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on. Is done. As in the case of the main board 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power supply can be used as the backup area 513a.

  The above-mentioned main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors a DC stable (for example, 30 volt) voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251 and the voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption) is detected, and the above-described power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of the power-off signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power-off process.

  Note that the electrical characteristics of the main substrate 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than the predetermined voltage at which the power-off signal is output, a sufficient time for performing the predetermined process such as the power-off process is obtained. During this time, the output of a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 by another system. You may make it.

  Further, the above-described power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 can be arranged in a part other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply substrate 251, and a power interruption signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each substrate on the power supply substrate 251. Further, it is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the function of the power supply board 251 may be performed by the main board 102. In this case, the power supply unit 541 may be formed on the main substrate 102.

  Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power-off signal and perform a power-off process based on the power-off signal. Alternatively, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, and the power off signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

  Here, the main CPU 501, the payout CPU 511, and the like are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. In addition, the trigger of the execution of the power-off processing includes a hardware-type that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-down signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. In a periodic interruption process based on the setting, there is a software-based process in which a power-off flag set when a voltage drop is detected is confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the power-off processing is performed based on a hardware trigger by the NMI. The signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting a power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs the power interruption signal, but also when noise is mixed into a signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power-off processing can be performed based on a software method as described later as another embodiment. Further, it is also possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal to trigger execution of power-off processing.
<Basic functions of main board>

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as, for example, ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission, by the operations of the above-described components (see FIG. 4). For this reason, the main board 102 can be understood as having functional means (described later) for performing these various functions. Similarly, the sub-main board 301, the sub-sub board 302, and the like, which are other control boards, are provided with functional means for performing various functions.

FIG. 5 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Among them, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determining unit 110, a first lottery unit 111, a second lottery unit 112, a general drawing lottery unit 113, a hold control unit 114, a main display control unit 115, a special game control unit 116, Specific game control means 117, opening / closing control means 118, prior information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as described below in order, a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a normal symbol, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening and closing control, advance information Execute notification etc.
<<< Potential lottery function for special symbols >>>

  The above-mentioned ball entry judging means 110 judges the entry of a game ball into each winning port (each operating port, various starting winning ports, various large winning ports, general winning ports, etc.). More specifically, the entering ball judging means 110 receives the passage information when the game ball passes through the left operation port 68a (or the right operation port 68b), and the game ball is set to the left operation port 68a (or the right operation port 68b). ). Further, the ball entry determining means 110 receives the first start winning information (or the second start winning information) when the game ball enters the first start winning port 62 (or the second start winning port 63), and It is determined that the ball has entered the first start winning opening 62 (or the second starting winning opening 63).

  In addition, when the game ball enters the first special winning opening 91 (or the second special winning opening 92), the winning determination unit 110 determines whether or not the first special winning opening winning information (or the second special winning opening winning information). It is determined that the game ball has entered the first special winning opening 91 (or the second special winning opening 92). Further, the ball entry determining means 110 receives general winning information when the game ball has entered the general winning opening 72, and determines that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 72.

  The above-described first lottery means 111 executes a first lottery corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning opening 62. That is, the first lottery means 111 has functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first success / failure determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). In addition, each functional means such as the first lottery value acquiring means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 will be described later.

  Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes a second lottery corresponding to the ball entry into the second starting winning opening 63. That is, the second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second success / failure determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 71 of the main control display device 53 described above. In addition, each functional means such as the second lottery value acquiring means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 will be described later.

  The first lottery value acquiring means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above, when the ball enters the first starting winning opening 62, changes the value of the big hit random number according to the first lottery to the first winning / rejecting lottery value. To get as Further, the second lottery value acquiring means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above, when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63, changes the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery to the second hit / fail status. Get as a lottery value.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / decreasing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / decreasing lottery value are generated by a two-stage random number generating means. More specifically, the random numbers used for the jackpot lottery are generated by an operation (addition) using the above-mentioned hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit can be used. As the software random number, a value updated for each interrupt by a random number generation program in software can be used. Note that any one of a hardware random number and a software random number may be used. The details of the hardware random number and the software random number will be described later.

The first success / failure determination means 122 in the first succession lottery means 111 makes a success / failure determination based on the first success / failure lottery value, and determines whether or not the first success / failure lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) to be a hit. Judge. Similarly, the second success / failure determination means 126 in the second succession lottery means 112 makes a success / failure determination based on the above-mentioned second success / failure lottery value, and the second success / failure lottery value is changed to a predetermined value (hit value) which is a hit. Determine whether this is the case. In the determination of the success / failure by the first success / failure determination means 122 and the second success / failure determination means 126, a success / failure determination table which defines a correspondence between the first success / failure lottery value and the second success / failure lottery value and the result of the big hit lottery is used. Details of the success / failure determination table will be described later.
<< Symbol lottery function for special symbols >>

  Next, the symbol lottery by the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 will be described. First, the first symbol determining means 123 determines the type of the first special symbol in the case of winning one of the big hits in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol, and determines the type of the first special symbol in the big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery (see FIG. a)). The big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the first symbol lottery value, which is a random value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the first special symbol.

  Here, the first symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “a symbol random number per special symbol” or “symbol random number” related to the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is included in the type of the hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 determines the type of the first special symbol when the small hit is won in the big hit lottery relating to the first special symbol. Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C). In addition, the first symbol determination means 123 determines the type of the first special symbol based on the lost symbol determination table (see FIG. 9 (d)) when the first special symbol is deviated in the jackpot lottery.

  The first symbol lottery value is obtained when the player enters the first start winning opening 62 in the same manner as the first winning / losing lottery value. In addition, the type of the first special symbol is associated with the type of the hit, and the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of the small hit are determined in association with the acquired first symbol lottery value. That is, the first symbol lottery value is acquired at the timing of the ball entry into the first start winning opening 62, and at a predetermined timing, the first symbol lottery value corresponding to the first symbol lottery value is determined based on the big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery. 1 Special symbols and hit types are determined. The details of the big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery will be described later.

  The above-described second symbol determination means 127 determines the type of the second special symbol in the case of winning one of the hits in the jackpot lottery relating to the second special symbol by using the big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery (see FIG. 9 ( b)). The big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery is, like the above-mentioned first lottery symbol determination table for the lottery, a second symbol lottery value that is a random value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and a second special symbol Specifies the relationship with the type.

  Here, the second symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “symbol random number per special symbol” or “symbol random number” related to the second special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is included in the hit type, and the second symbol determining means 127 determines the type of the second special symbol when the small hit is won in the big hit lottery according to the second special symbol. Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C). In addition, the second symbol determining means 127 determines the type of the second special symbol based on the lost symbol determination table (see FIG. 9D) when a large hit lottery related to the second special symbol is lost. In addition, the second symbol determination means 127 may also have a lost symbol corresponding to the first deviation and the second deviation, or each of the first symbol determination means 123 and the second symbol determination means 127, You may make it have the N-th off design (N is a natural number of 1 or more) including the 3 or more off design. Also in these cases, it is possible to apply a notice processing mode and a notice effect pattern for a second outlier according to Tokujin 1 described later.

  The second symbol lottery value is acquired upon entering a ball into the second starting winning opening 63, similarly to the above-described second winning / losing lottery value. In addition, the type of the second special symbol is associated with the type of the hit, and the type of the big hit and the presence or absence of the small hit are determined in association with the acquired second symbol lottery value. In other words, the second symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the second start winning opening 63, and at a predetermined timing, the second symbol lottery value corresponding to the second symbol lottery value is determined based on the second jackpot symbol determination table. 2 Special symbols and types of jackpots are determined. The details of the big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the type of the symbol is determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the symbol random number provided separately from the jackpot random number, but is not limited thereto. Instead, for example, a special symbol type may be previously linked to the big hit random number, and the special symbol type may be determined based on the value of the big hit random number acquired.
<< Fluctuating pattern lottery function for special symbols >>

  Next, the variation pattern lottery by the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 will be described. First, the first pattern determination unit 124 determines a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 based on a special figure variation pattern table (described later). Further, the special figure variation pattern table defines a relationship between a number of special figure variation patterns and a first pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  The first pattern lottery value, like the above-mentioned first winning / losing lottery value, is acquired when the ball enters the first start winning port 62. In addition, the second pattern lottery value is acquired upon entering a ball into the second starting winning opening 63 in the same manner as the above-described second winning / losing lottery value. In addition, the variation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol include, for example, differences in various game situations such as at the time of a big hit, at the time of a miss, the presence or absence of a reach, the degree of reach development, the presence or absence of a time reduction, the number of holdings, and the like. Are provided for each of the decision elements corresponding to. In the present embodiment, the total number of the fluctuation patterns reaches about 100.

  Further, each variation pattern is associated with a first pattern lottery value or a second pattern lottery value, and is associated with the obtained first pattern lottery value or the second pattern lottery value, and the variation according to the game situation. The pattern is fixed. That is, the first pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the first start winning port 62, and the second pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the second start winning port 63. Then, at a predetermined timing, a variation pattern according to the game situation is determined based on the special figure variation pattern table.

  The change pattern (special figure change pattern) relating to the special symbol defines the time (change time) from the start to the stop of the change in the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure variation pattern defines various lengths of variation time, for example, from about 1 second to several minutes depending on the type. That is, in each of the special figure fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation time is set as the end condition of the fluctuation display, and the fluctuation time is determined in the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 6A). When the change display of the special symbol is started and the specified change time elapses, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the relationship between the lengths of the fluctuation times in the various special figure fluctuation patterns is not necessarily determined uniformly according to the game situation. In other words, the special figure variation pattern may have a common variation time in different types of special figure variation patterns. In addition, even if the special figure fluctuation patterns are defined for different game situations, the fluctuation times may be common to each other. Further, with respect to the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected during the time reduction may be longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected during the non-time reduction.

More specifically, the variation time of many of the special figure variation patterns to be selected during the time reduction is set shorter than that of the special figure variation pattern to be selected during the non-time reduction. However, in the present embodiment, for example, a special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when non-working hours and the number of reservations is four includes a fluctuation time compared to a particular special figure fluctuation pattern during time saving. The short ones are included.
<< Various lottery functions for ordinary symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The general figure lottery means 113 includes a general figure lottery value acquiring means 129, a general figure right / wrong determining means 130, a general figure design determining means 131, and a general figure pattern determining means 132. Then, when the passing ball determination means 110 detects the passing of the game ball in each of the operating ports 68a and 68b by the above-described ball entry determining means 110, the drawing-based lottery means 113 determines the lottery related to the ordinary symbol based on the detection result. ).

  In this general figure lottery, the general figure lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires a general figure lottery value which is a random number (general figure random number) related to the ordinary symbol, and the general figure determination means 131 obtains the general figure determination table. Referenced. In the general symbol determination table, the correspondence between the general symbol lottery value and the type of the ordinary symbol is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol linked to the universal drawing lottery value corresponds to the hit by the universal symbol lottery determining means 130, and if it corresponds to the hit, the type of the hit is determined. Is done.

  Further, the variation pattern (normal variation pattern) relating to the ordinary symbol is determined by the general pattern determining means 132. Each general pattern fluctuation pattern is associated with a general pattern lottery value that is a random number (general pattern fluctuation pattern random number) related to the general pattern fluctuation pattern, and is linked to the obtained general pattern fluctuation lottery value, and the game status The normal pattern fluctuation pattern according to is determined. In other words, the general pattern lottery value is acquired at the timing of entering the left operating port 68a or the right operating port 68b, and at a predetermined timing, based on the general pattern changing pattern table, the general pattern changing pattern corresponding to the game situation. Is determined. The normal fluctuation pattern is provided for each determinant corresponding to a difference in various game situations such as, for example, a hit time, a losing time, a hit type, whether or not there is a shortened time.

  In addition, the normal figure fluctuation pattern defines the time from the start of the fluctuation to the stop (the fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. In the non-time-saving game state, the normal figure variation pattern defines several variation times, for example, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds, depending on the type. On the other hand, in accordance with the special symbol time-saving game state, the normal figure change also becomes a time-saving game, and in the time-saving state, the normal figure fluctuation pattern defines a fluctuation time of several hundred milliseconds to several seconds. That is, the fluctuation time is determined as the end condition of the fluctuation display in each general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started in the above-described ordinary symbol display section 59 (see FIG. 6A). When the specified fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined winning symbol, the second starting winning opening 63 is expanded in a mode corresponding to the type of winning.

  The details of the general figure lottery value, the general figure pattern lottery value, and the opening pattern of the second start winning opening 63 relating to the ordinary symbol will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, after the determination of the ordinary symbol, the hit determination is performed based on the determined normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hit determination is performed first based on the acquired general symbol lottery value. May be performed, and the type of the ordinary symbol may be determined based on the result of the hit determination. In addition, a winning / rejecting lottery value related to a normal symbol may be provided, and after performing the winning / rejecting lottery of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary figure lottery may be performed according to the result of the winning / rejecting lottery.

Further, in the present embodiment, the general figure lottery value, which is a random number related to a normal symbol, and the general pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers, but are not limited to this, and are not limited to this. Each random number can be a hardware random number or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<< Function for holding special symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-described hold control unit 114 will be described. The holding control unit 114 includes a first holding unit 133, a second holding unit 134, and a general-purpose holding unit 135. Among these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined change start condition relating to the first special symbol is not satisfied when a new entry to the first starting winning opening 62 is made. The information (first special figure hold storage information) relating to the various random numbers (the first winning / failure lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the like) is temporarily stored on hold. Until the change start condition is satisfied, the start of the change display of the first special symbol related to the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold for the first special symbol is set to four, and the hold for the first special symbol can be made within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

  When the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and furthermore, if there is a hold related to the first special symbol in the first holding means 133, the change start condition relating to the first special symbol is satisfied. , A new symbol change relating to the first special symbol is permitted. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the second game is executed prior to the first game, the second special figure holding storage information by the second holding unit 134 is stored by the first holding unit 133. The digest is preferentially digested over the first special figure pending storage information. As described above, with respect to the first special symbol, all the symbols corresponding to the second special symbol holding storage information of the second special symbol have been changed, and all the symbols have been consumed, which is also a change start condition.

  Regarding the above-mentioned second holding means 134, if a predetermined ballistic change start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied when a ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63, the ball is acquired by the ball entry. The information on the various random numbers (the second winning / losing lottery value, the second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored.

When the change display of the second special symbol, which has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered, ends, and when the second special symbol exists in the second storing means 134, the second special symbol is displayed. Is established, and a new symbol change relating to the second special symbol is permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold for the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol. Is possible.
<< Functions related to holding ordinary symbols >>

  Next, the above-mentioned ordinary drawing holding means 135 will be described. If there is a ball entering the operating ports 68a and 68b (see FIG. 1) and the predetermined fluctuation start condition relating to the ordinary symbol is not satisfied, the general figure holding means 135 generates the random number (normal (Drawing lottery values, etc.) (temporary drawing hold storage information) is temporarily stored temporarily. Until the change start condition is satisfied, the change display of the ordinary symbol related to the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the holding of the ordinary symbol is set to four, and the holding of the ordinary symbol is possible within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

When the change display of the ordinary symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered ends, and further, when there is no hold related to the ordinary symbol generated before the above-mentioned ball entry, the normal symbol is displayed. The variation start condition is satisfied, and a new symbol variation relating to the ordinary symbol is permitted.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

  Next, the main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special figure control means 136 determines that the second special symbol is not suspended and the first lottery means 111 determines the first special symbol if the change start condition relating to the first special symbol is satisfied. In the first special symbol display section 70 (see FIG. 6 (a)), the first special symbol change display (for example, the blinking display that blinks the LED indicators M and N every 100 msec) in accordance with the 1 special symbol change pattern. I do. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 at the determined symbol when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses.

  Further, the second special symbol control unit 137, according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the variation start condition relating to the second special symbol described above is satisfied, the second special symbol display unit 71 ( In FIG. 6A, the second special symbol is changed and displayed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 at the determined symbol after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display during the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is such that the LED indicator lamps M and N blink at the same time in the first special symbol, and the LED indicator lamp W in the second special symbol. , X flash at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the eight LED display lights G to N (Q to X) are sequentially turned on in a predetermined pattern, or all of the G to N (Q to X) are blinked at the same time to display a variable display. May be performed.

  In addition, the ordinary symbol control unit 138, according to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determined by the ordinary symbol lottery means 113, determines that the ordinary symbol display unit 59 (FIG. In a)), a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. Further, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern elapses, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 59 at the determined symbol.

Further, the hold display control unit 139 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol. The display of the number of these reservations is performed by the first special symbol storage display unit (LED display lamps O and P) and the second special symbol storage display unit (LED display) of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Lamps Y and Z) and a normal symbol storage and display unit (LED display lamps C and D). Further, the other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol, and the various holding displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the first special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when a big hit (or a small hit) is hit in the first lottery. The first special winning opening 91 is opened in a predetermined manner according to the type of the big hit as described above. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when a big hit (or a small hit) is hit in the second lottery, the special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied. The special game for opening the second big winning opening 92 in a predetermined manner according to the type of big hit as described above is executed.
<< Functions related to specific games >>

  Subsequently, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs the control related to the above-described probability change, time saving, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a certain change state, a time reduction state, or the like according to the type of the big hit. In this embodiment, the probable change state is associated with a predetermined type of jackpot, and is continued until the total number of display changes after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). During the probable change state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than the normal time at the time of non-probability change.

  In this embodiment, the time saving state is such that the sum of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a predetermined end condition count (eg, 100, 60, 40 times) counted from the end of the special game. , 20 times). Further, during the time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 operate the variation pattern for the time saving so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Is selected, and control is performed to switch the fluctuation pattern table so as to shorten the fluctuation time also for the ordinary symbols.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed as the specific game, and in this ball entry facilitation game, the opening / closing control of the second start winning port 63 is executed. The opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 is controlled by opening / closing control means 118 described later. Therefore, the specific game control means 117 causes the opening / closing control means 118 to perform predetermined opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 during the specific game state. In addition, the specific aspect of the certainty change, the time saving, and the easy ball entry game during the specific game will be described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

  Next, the opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary motorized accessory in the second starting winning opening 63 and the special electrically powered accessory in the first winning opening 91 and the second winning opening 92. When the ordinary symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric auditors at the second start winning opening 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the first special winning opening solenoid 80 and the second special winning opening solenoid 81 in the special game, and the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening are controlled. Release 92.

Further, the opening / closing control means 118 executes opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 during the normal game. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 executes the opening / closing control of the second starting winning opening 63 based on an opening pattern related to a specific game as described later, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the special game.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

  Next, the above-described advance information notifying unit 119 will be described. The advance information notifying means 119 is acquired when the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 receives a ball, regardless of whether or not the symbol change display corresponding to the ball is held. A process for transmitting the information on the various random numbers as the advance notification information to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) is performed.

  Examples of the above-mentioned advance notice information include, for example, discrimination as to which of the first game and the second game is the advance notice information, information indicating the acquired first pattern lottery value and second pattern lottery value, and the like. Can be exemplified. In addition, as the prior notification information other than the above, the acquired respective winning / decreasing lottery values (first or second winning / decreasing lottery values) and the respective symbol lottery values (first symbol or lottery values) are obtained. Information such as what kind of winning / falling range, symbol range, and pattern range each pattern lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notification information, various prefetch effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. Examples of the pre-reading effect include a suspension notice and a continuous notice, and details thereof will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Next, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting unit 120 transmits a command from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as, for example, at the time of a winning start, at the start of the change of the special symbol, at the stop of the change of the special symbol, and at the time of occurrence of a big hit. The transmission timing and contents of such a command will be described later.
<Basic function of sub-board>

  Next, basic functions of the above-described sub-substrate 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and by the operation of the above-described configuration (see FIG. 4), receiving commands from the main board 102, determining an effect pattern, and controlling effect display. And perform various functions such as directing. For this reason, the sub-substrate 104 can be grasped as having functional means (described later) that perform various functions, similarly to the main substrate 102.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub main board 301 includes a main command receiving unit 141, an effect pattern determining unit 142, a sub main command transmitting unit 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional units such as a sound control unit 144 for controlling a speaker output and the like and a light control unit 145 for controlling a game effect lamp output and the like. Note that the term “lamp” in the present embodiment has a meaning including an LED and the like.

  The sub main board 301 receives various commands from the main board 102 by the main command receiving unit 141. Further, the effect pattern determining means 142 determines an effect pattern corresponding to the aforementioned special figure variation pattern (first special figure variation pattern or second special figure variation pattern) based on various commands from the main board 102. Here, in the relationship between the special figure change pattern and the effect pattern, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one special figure change pattern, and the effect determination based on the lottery and the one effect change Only one effect pattern is associated with a pattern, and there is a case where one effect always results in an effect lottery. The effect pattern determining means 142 determines a combination of the stop symbols of the effect symbol 190.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination means 142 includes information for designating a display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and a sound effect and a light effect performed in conjunction with the display effect as needed. The above-described display effects include a display pattern of the effect symbol 190, a display pattern of an effect that inspires an expectation of a jackpot during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 190, and indicates a high degree of expectation of the jackpot. It is.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub-board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting means 143. The command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 also includes the sound information determined by the sound control unit 144 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with a sub-main command receiving unit 146, an effect execution control unit 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub-board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays an effect moving image. The effect execution control means 147 activates the above-described sound control circuit 537 (see FIG. 4) provided on the sub-sub-board 302 to execute control relating to output adjustment of the various speakers 21 and the like. The details of the various effects will be described later.

The functional units included in the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub-board 302 have been described above. It is also possible. Similarly, any one of the functional units included in the sub-main substrate 301 can be included in the main substrate 102 or the sub-sub substrate 302. Further, the functional means of the sub-sub-board 302 can be included in the sub-main board 301.
<Specific aspects of various lotteries on the main board>
<<< Lots for special designs >>>

  Next, a description will be given of a specific mode of the winning / non-winning lottery (big hit lottery) relating to a special symbol, which is performed on the main board 102. FIG. 8A shows a hit / fail judgment table used in the present embodiment. In this hit / fail judgment table, a random number per special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “hit / fail random number”) and a first game related to the first game are shown. The correspondence between the result of one lottery and the result of the second lottery related to the second game is defined. That is, the range of the random number is shown at the left end in FIG. 8A, and the lottery result related to the first lottery is shown at the center in the figure. Further, the right end in the figure shows the lottery result related to the first lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the range of the pass / fail random numbers is “0 to 63238”, “63239 to 63402”, “63403 to 64878”, “64879 to 65429”, “65430 to 65534”, and “ 65535 ". Further, the results of the first lottery and the second lottery include “outside”, “probably large hit at normal time”, “big hit at certainty change”, and “small hit”.

  Of these, “missing” is a lottery result that always results in a lottery regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the above-described probability change. Further, the "normal time probability variation big hit" is a lottery result that always wins regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the probability variation described above. Furthermore, the "big hit at the time of probability change" is normally a "losing", but is a lottery result which becomes a hit only at the time of probability change. "Small hit" is a lottery result in which the type of hit is a small hit.

  That is, the random number value range in this embodiment is “0-65535”, and the number of random numbers is 65536. In both the first lottery and the second lottery, a random result of “out” is assigned to the random value range of “0 to 63238” and the random value of “65535”. In addition, the random number value range “63239 to 63402” is assigned “normal time probability change big hit”, and the random number range “63403 to 64878” is assigned “probability change time big hit”.

  Further, to the random number range “64879 to 65429”, “small hit” is assigned to the first lottery, and “out” is assigned to the second lottery. Further, “small hit” is assigned to the random number range “65430 to 65534” in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

  Then, if the random number value obtained as described above (hereinafter referred to as “winning / rejecting lottery value”) is within the range of “0 to 63238”, the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is regardless of the probability state. The result is "out". In addition, the probability state is also set when the winning / losing lottery value in the second lottery is in the range of “64879 to 65429” and when the winning / losing lottery value in the first lottery and the second lottery is “65535”. Regardless, the result of the lottery is “out”. That is, when the winning / rejecting lottery value is “0” which is the lower limit of the winning / rejecting random number range or “65535” which is the upper limit, the lottery result is “out”.

  In addition, in the normal state where the probability state is low probability, in either of the first lottery and the second lottery, a hit is made only when the winning / rejecting lottery value falls in the range of “63239 to 63402”. On the other hand, at the time of the probability change, the range of the hit is expanded, and the big hit is obtained not only when the winning / non-winning lottery value falls within the range of “63239 to 63402” but also when it falls within the range of “63403 to 64878”.

  In this way, a group consisting of continuous numerical values for each lottery result is formed for the numerical range of the random numbers. Then, for example, in the first lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the numerical value range “0 to 63238” is out of the group, “63239 to 63402” is the normal time probability changing big hit group, and “63403 to 64878” is It is usually a big hit group. Further, the numerical ranges “64879 to 65429” and “65430 to 65534” are all small hit groups, and “65535” is a loss group.

  Then, for example, in the first lottery, the number of random numbers corresponding to the deviation on the lower limit side is 63239. Further, the number of random numbers corresponding to the normal time jackpot (big hit 1) is 164, and the number of random numbers corresponding to the normal big hit (big hit 2) is 1476. In addition, the number of random numbers corresponding to the small hit is 656 (= 551 + 105), and the number of random numbers corresponding to outliers on the upper limit side is one. And the big hit probability at the time of the normal probability in the first game is 164/65536, and the big hit probability at the time of the high probability is 1640 (= 1476 + 164) / 65536.

  As described above, the pass / fail random number can take a value in the range of “0 to 65535”. In the present embodiment, the pass / fail random number is a hardware random number in the range of “0 to 65535”, and “0 to 65535”. ６５65520 ”is obtained by summing with a soft random number (software random number) per special symbol in the numerical range of“ ６５65520 ”. The internal random number is a value extracted from the internal random number table. In the built-in random number table, numerical values in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 65535”) are arranged in an arbitrary order, and the count value is incremented by one by hardware (counter circuit) using a clock input to the CPU 501. Each time the numerical values are arbitrarily arranged in the built-in random number table, the numerical values are obtained in the order in which they are arranged, regardless of the magnitude relation of the numerical values directly. Then, the numerical value in the acquired internal random number table is extracted and used for the calculation with the soft random number. It can be said that such a built-in random number is a random number generated by a random number generation device including a hardware configuration.

  On the other hand, the software random number can be said to be a random number generated by a software-configured random number generation device that adds a count value by one for each interrupt by a programmed counter and acquires numerical values arranged in ascending or descending order. . In the present embodiment, the number of soft random numbers per special symbol is “65521”, which is a prime number, and the software random number added to the internal random number as the addition source is larger than the internal random number. The random number value range (the size of the random number) is set small. Here, the generation of the pass / fail random number is not limited to simply adding the built-in random number and the software random number. For example, the random number may be added or multiplied or multiplied by a predetermined number and then added together. , And other calculations.

In the present embodiment, the pass / fail random number is generated by a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to generate a pass / fail random number using only one of the combinations.
<< Design lottery related to special designs >>

  Next, a specific mode of a symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) related to a special symbol performed on the main board 102 will be described. 9 (a) to 9 (d) show various symbol determination tables. In the present embodiment, each symbol determination table is used when a large hit, a small hit, or a loss occurs in the above-mentioned win / fail lottery. Is being used.

  Among these, FIG. 9A is a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery (first big hit symbol determination table), and FIG. 9B is a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery (second big hit symbol). Determination table). FIG. 9C is a symbol determination table for small hits (small hit symbol determination table) which is referred to when the result of the win / fail determination in the first lottery or the second lottery is a small hit. Further, FIG. 9D shows a symbol determination table for a loss (a loss symbol determination table) which is referred to when a result of the determination of success or failure in the first lottery or the second lottery is a loss. In this embodiment, many kinds (for example, about 50 patterns) of special symbols are used by using the first special symbol display section 70 and the second special symbol display section 71 shown in FIG. Although the display is performed, here, the description will be made assuming that there are only ten types of special symbols “0” to “9” so that the description and illustration are not complicated.

  As shown at the left end in FIG. 9A, in the first jackpot symbol determination table, the symbol random number value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999”, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. ing. Further, the symbol random number value ranges are “0 to 39”, “40 to 99”, “100 to 109”, “110 to 119”, “120 to 499”, “500 to 619”, “620 to 699”, It is divided into groups of “700 to 799”, “800 to 809”, “810 to 859”, “860 to 961”, and “962 to 999”. As shown, “7”, “7”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “3”, “3”, “1”, “0”, “0”, “2”, “2” Is assigned. In addition, a special jackpot type is assigned to each special symbol. In the present embodiment, the above-described 16R certain change is assigned to the special symbols “7” and “5”, and the special symbols “3” and “5” are assigned. The above-mentioned 4R probability change is allocated to "1", and the above-mentioned 4R normal is allocated to special symbols "0" and "2".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the second lottery, the symbol random number value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the first lottery, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. ing. Further, the symbol random number value ranges are “0 to 109”, “110 to 119”, “120 to 499”, “500 to 619”, “620 to 759”, “760 to 799”, “800 to 859”, It is divided into each group of “860-911” and “912-999”, and each symbol random number range includes “7”, “7”, “7”, “5” as shown in the figure. , "3", "1", "0", "2", and "2". In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 16R probability change is assigned to the special symbols "7" and "5", and the above-mentioned 4R probability change is assigned to the special symbols "3" and "1". The aforementioned 4R normal is assigned to “2”.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the success / failure lottery is a big hit, a special symbol (a non-16R big hit symbol) which is a big hit other than the 16R big hit is set in “999” which is the upper limit in the numerical range of the above-mentioned symbol random number. Have been assigned. In addition, the lottery result of the non-16R big hit symbol may be assigned to the lower limit “0”, and the lottery result of the non-16R big hit symbol may be assigned to both the upper limit and the lower limit.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, in the first lottery and the second lottery, the symbol random number value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the case of the big hit symbol determination, and the number of the symbol random numbers is 1,000. It has become. Further, the symbol random number value ranges are divided into groups of “0 to 332” and “333 to 999”, and the symbol random number value ranges are “4”, “6”, and “6” as shown in the figure. Is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the first lottery and the second lottery, the symbol random number value range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” like the big hit symbol determination and the small hit symbol determination. Are 1000. Further, in the first lottery, the symbol random number value ranges are divided into groups of “0 to 961”, which are the first loss ranges, and “962 to 999”, which are the second loss ranges. As shown in the figure, special symbols “8” and “9” are assigned to the numerical value range. In the present embodiment, the first miss is assigned to the special symbol "8", and the second miss is assigned to the special symbol "9".

  Among these, the first outlier is a standard outlier, and can be referred to as “standard outlier”. On the other hand, the second miss is used so as to produce an effect tendency different from that of the first miss, and may be referred to as “non-standard miss” or “specific miss”. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the second deviation is used for a pre-reading notice effect relating to a predetermined reach, and in such a meaning, it may be referred to as “reach deviation”.

  On the other hand, the symbol random number value range in the second lottery is “0 to 999” as in the first lottery, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. However, in the second lottery, the special symbol “8” is assigned to all of “0 to 999”. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first deviation is assigned to the special symbol “8”.

In the present embodiment, the symbol lottery relating to the special symbol is performed by software random numbers, and the process of generating random numbers is simplified as compared with the random lottery using both software random numbers and hardware random numbers. This is because the random lottery is likely to be subject to fraudulent acts, whereas the symbol lottery is less likely to be fraudulent than the random lottery. This is because the configuration eliminates the use of such components. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create the symbol random number only with the hardware random number, or to create the symbol random number with a combination of the hardware random number and the software random number.
<< Variable pattern lottery for special symbols >>

  Next, a specific mode of the lottery (variable pattern lottery) related to the fluctuation pattern performed on the main substrate 102 will be described. 10 (a) to 10 (d) show the variation pattern tables. Among them, FIG. 10 (a) shows that the above-mentioned success / failure result is “missing” and the type of the missing symbol is 5 shows a first-losing variation pattern table used when the symbol is a first-losing symbol (first-losing symbol). Further, FIG. 10 (b) shows a second example which is used when the result is “losing” and the type of the missing symbol is a symbol related to the above-mentioned second symbol (a second symbol). 9 shows a variation pattern table for outliers. Further, FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern table for a 16R jackpot used when the above-mentioned hit / fail result is “16R big hit”, and FIG. The variation pattern table for the non-16R big hit used in the case of "4R big hit" or "small hit" is shown.

  In each of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the variation pattern random value range related to the variation pattern lottery is “0 to 49999”, and the number of symbol random numbers is 50,000. Further, in the variation pattern table for “first loss” shown in FIG. 10A (the variation pattern table for first loss design), the variation pattern random value ranges are “0 to 2599” and “2600 to 4999”. , "5000 to 49999", and the fluctuation patterns of "Super 1" and "Super 2" are assigned to the fluctuation pattern random value ranges of "0 to 2599" and "2600 to 4999", respectively. Have been. Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern such as “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern random number range of “5000 to 49999”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each variation pattern is roughly “other than“ no reach ”accompanied by the above-described effect of displaying reach (hereinafter referred to as“ reach effect ”), and is other than“ no reach ”. Reach available ". Of these, “no reach” designates an effect pattern that does not reach the contents among various effect patterns described later. Further, the variation patterns of “without reach” and other “with reach” include a large number (for example, about several tens) of variation patterns that are further subdivided, but the description and illustration are omitted here. In order to avoid this, the fluctuation patterns are grouped comprehensively.

  In other words, the above-mentioned “reach” is always displayed as a combination mode of the effect symbols 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) unless a special effect pattern is included in the case of a big hit. Things. In addition, even if a big hit does not occur, the character may be out of reach (reach is out) through the display mode of “reach”. For this reason, when "reach" is reached, the player can expect that an effect leading to a big hit will be developed thereafter. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern of “No reach” is selected, the “reach” will not be achieved unless a special effect pattern is included. It doesn't do it.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of various fluctuation patterns of “without reach” is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of “with reach”. However, such a relationship between the fluctuation times merely shows a tendency, and some of the fluctuation patterns included in “without reach” have a longer fluctuation time than those with “reach”. It is also possible to set such a relationship that is long.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, the above-mentioned fluctuation patterns of “with reach” include fluctuation patterns of “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “normal 3”, which are so-called normal reach, It can be divided into so-called super reach (also called special reach) “super 1”, “super 2”, and “super 3” fluctuation patterns. Among these, each of the fluctuation patterns of “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “Normal 3” indicates the degree of fanning (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “fanning”) related to the expectation of the jackpot for the player. , And designates a production with a relatively low reach as compared with the super reach. In addition, the above-mentioned respective fluctuation patterns of “super 1”, “super 2”, and “super 3” specify an effect with a reach in which the degree of fanning for the player is relatively higher than that in the normal reach. .

  Note that each of these fluctuation patterns from “normal 1” to “normal 3” and “super 1” to “super 3” also includes a large number (for example, about 50) of fluctuation patterns that are further subdivided. Here, the variation patterns are comprehensively grouped so that the description and illustration are not complicated. In addition, the fluctuation patterns of “reach present”, “normal 1” to “normal 3”, and “super 1” to “super 3” are further divided into those for off-going and those for big hits. However, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D, a common name is used here.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the variation pattern table for “first miss”, each of “super 1”, “super 2”, “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach” is displayed. A fluctuation pattern has been assigned. For this reason, when the flag “00H” of “out” is stored in the RWM as a result of the winning / rejecting lottery, one of these fluctuation patterns is selected according to the obtained fluctuation pattern random number value. You. In the lottery of the variation pattern, a different variation pattern is selected according to the game situation such as the number of reservations at that time and the game state (whether or not during the working hours). If the result of the lottery is “missing”, the first variation pattern table for the first losing shown in FIG. 10A is set first. Immediately thereafter, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the information that the symbol (the second symbol) relating to the above-described second symbol (see FIG. 9D) is determined, that is, the symbol number “9” is stored. The table is changed to that shown in FIG. 10B, and control is performed so that only the reach variation pattern is selected.

  Subsequently, in the variation pattern table for the “second loss” shown in FIG. 10B (the variation pattern table for the second loss design), the variation pattern random value ranges are “0 to 23999” and “24000 to 49999”. , And a variation pattern of “super 3” is assigned to a variation pattern random value range of “0 to 23999”. Further, a fluctuation pattern of “Normal 3” is assigned to a fluctuation pattern random number range of “24000 to 49999”. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the numbers and the variation patterns in the variation pattern table for the “second loss” is described in the variation pattern tables for “4R big hit” and “small hit” described later (FIG. 10D). Reference).

  Subsequently, for the 16R jackpot shown in FIG. 10C, “super 1” is associated with the group of the pattern lottery values “0 to 23519”, and “super 1” is associated with the group of the pattern lottery values “23520 to 47039”. "2" is associated with it. Furthermore, the group of pattern lottery values “47040-48999” is associated with “Normal 1”, and the group of pattern lottery values “49000-49999” is associated with reach of “Normal 2”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of “with reach” is all selected when the result of the hit determination is the 16R big hit.

  For “4R big hit” and “small hit” shown in FIG. 10D, “super 3” is associated with the group of pattern lottery values “0 to 23999”, and the pattern lottery values “24000 to 49999” "Normal 3" is associated with the group of.

  Next, selection of a variation pattern according to a game situation (especially the number of reservations) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a variation pattern lottery according to the game situation will be described in the case where the result of the win / fail lottery is “first miss” (see FIG. 10A). In addition, as an index indicating the game situation, the number of holds is exemplified here.

  FIG. 8B shows the variation pattern table for “outside” in more detail than FIG. 10A. In FIG. 8B, the variation pattern lottery value is shown on the front side at the left end, and the number of reservations is shown at the top of the top row. The number of holdings is from the number of holdings 0 to the number of holdings 4, and below each holding number column, each of the fluctuation pattern lottery values “0 to 2599”, “2600 to 4999”, and “5000 to 49999” The fluctuation pattern assigned to the group is described. Here, in FIG. 8B, the number of holds 0 to 4 is described as “hold 0” to “hold 4”, respectively.

  In this embodiment, in all of the hold numbers 0 to 4, the change pattern of “super 1” is assigned to the change pattern lottery values “0 to 2599”, and “super 2” is assigned to the change pattern lottery values “2600 to 4999”. Is assigned. Further, the fluctuation pattern lottery values “5000 to 49999” are allocated with the fluctuation patterns “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “No reach”. Everything is different.

  In FIG. 8B, the relative relationship between the heights of the description columns of “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “No reach” is within the variation pattern lottery values “5000 to 49999”. Represents the difference in the allocation ratio. In other words, regarding the number of holds 0 and the number of holds 1 (shown as “hold 0, 1” in the figure), the heights in the “Normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach” columns are indicated. The allocation ratios of these fluctuation patterns within the fluctuation pattern lottery values “5000 to 49999” are also substantially equal (about 1/3).

  On the other hand, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 1” is smaller than that of the case of the number of reservations 0 and 1 for the number of reservations 2 and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 2” is , "Normal 1". Then, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is larger than the case of the number of holds 0 and the number of holds 1, and as a result, in the case of the number of holds 2, In comparison, “No reach” is easier to select, and “Normal 1” and “Reach 2” are harder to select.

  Also, for the number of reservations 3, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 1” is even smaller than in the case of the number of reservations 2, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 2” is “normal 1”. It is about the same. Then, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is even larger than the case of the number of holds 2, and as a result, the case of the number of holds 3 is “less reach” compared to the case of the number of holds 2. Are easily selected, and it is difficult to select “normal 1” and “reach 2”.

  Further, for the number of reservations 4, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 1” is even smaller than that of the case of the number of reservations 3, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 2” is “normal 1”. It is about the same. Then, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is even larger than the case of the number of reservations 3, and as a result, the case of the number of reservations 4 is larger than the case of the number of reservations 3 Are easily selected, and it is difficult to select “normal 1” and “reach 2”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as the number of reservations increases, a tendency that “no reach” is easily selected and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are hardly selected tends to occur. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation pattern of “without reach” is relatively shorter than the fluctuation pattern of “with reach”, so that the fluctuation time increases as the number of holdings increases. There is a tendency that the time is short.

  In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern lottery value is assigned to the number of holds 0 and the number of holds 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Can be easily selected, and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are hardly selected.

  FIG. 8 (b) shows the number of holds as an attribute related to the game situation, but is not limited to the number of holds. Or not, whether it is the first game or the second game, whether or not the result of the hit lottery is a big hit, what kind of hit big hit is, the number of specific fluctuations after the big hit This can be performed based on various attributes such as a period. For example, in the time reduction, if there is no big hit, “no reach” is selected with a probability of 90% or more, and in the case of a big hit, “normal 1” and a fluctuation pattern of “with reach” with a probability of 98% or more are selected. It is possible to set the fluctuation pattern table so that a tendency such that one of “reach 2” is selected occurs. Similarly, the variation pattern table for the second miss (FIG. 10B) can be subdivided and controlled, and the second miss and other conditions (for example, a limited frequency pattern effect described later, etc.). ) May be determined prioritizing the table.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern lottery relating to the special symbol is performed by a software random number similarly to the above-described symbol lottery. The generation process has been simplified. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create a random number related to a variation pattern lottery of a special symbol using only hardware random numbers, or a combination of hardware random numbers and software random numbers.
<< Various lotteries related to ordinary symbols >>

  Next, specific modes of the various lotteries related to the above-described ordinary symbols will be described. First, the lottery relating to the ordinary symbol includes a general symbol lottery and a general pattern fluctuation pattern lottery. In these various types of lottery, the corresponding random numbers, the general symbol random number and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number, are used. Although not shown, the respective random number ranges are such that the general symbol random numbers are 0 to 262, and the general symbol variation pattern random numbers are 0 to 232. In addition, as described above, when performing the winning / rejecting lottery relating to the ordinary symbol, a general-purpose success / failure random number is provided, and the range of the general-purpose success / failure random number can be set to a predetermined numerical range such as 0 to 282. is there.

  The ordinary symbols determined by the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery include those associated with the above-mentioned short opening and long opening. Then, if the value of the obtained general symbol random number corresponds to the short opening, after the normal symbol corresponding to the short opening is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is set for a relatively short time. Is in the open state. In addition, when the random number value corresponding to the hit is obtained in the general symbol pass / fail determination, if the obtained general symbol random number value corresponds to the long opening, the normal symbol corresponding to the long opening is stopped and displayed. After that, the above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is opened for a relatively long time.

  That is, the long release is performed at the time of the specific game as described above, but may be performed at the time other than the specific game. Such short opening and long opening that are performed other than during the specific game are referred to as “normal game short opening”, “normal short opening”, “normal game long opening”, “normal long opening”, respectively. It can be called. It should be noted that the hit symbols related to the ordinary symbols are not limited to those associated with the short opening or the long opening, and may be provided with those associated with other opening modes. As this “other opening mode”, for example, middle opening set to an opening time belonging to short opening and long opening can be exemplified.

  Further, with respect to the general pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the above-described general pattern fluctuation pattern random numbers, the fluctuation pattern defines the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. And, regarding the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, a different tendency is generated depending on factors such as a success / failure, a symbol, and a game state (including the number of holdings).

  For example, with respect to a game state other than the specific game (non-specific game state), in the present embodiment, five general-purpose variation patterns are provided. More specifically, the fluctuation times defined by the five general-purpose fluctuation patterns during the non-specific game are five types of 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is only one general pattern change pattern during the specific game, and the change time is shorter (for example, about 2 seconds) than during the non-specific game.

In addition, the variation pattern of the normal symbol that can be selected during the specific game may be, for example, a plurality of types having different variation times, or may be controlled so as to have a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory. By doing so, the opening timing of the second start winning opening 63 performed after the end of the fluctuation time at the time of hitting becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the so-called stopping hit, which is to fire the game ball at a proper timing, is prevented. It is possible to do.
<Specific modes related to specific games>

Next, a specific mode of the specific game described above will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the specific game includes the certainty change, the time saving, and the easy ball entry game. In the present embodiment, at least one of these various games is executed in a mode according to the result of the jackpot lottery. It should be noted that the function of causing the probability change or the like can be referred to as a “privilege function”.
<< Probability variation game >>

  In the probability variation game (the above-described probability change), when the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined one, the probability state of the subsequent game is changed so that the probability of occurrence of the jackpot becomes higher than the normal probability state. Things. The specific mode of the jackpot lottery in this probability change will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the duration of the probable change state (probability change period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol has changed.

The number of times the special symbol changes is determined as one time from the special symbol change display to the stop display. In the present embodiment, the probable change state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the predetermined big hit in the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the probable change period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as, for example, an ST function.
<< Fluctuating time shortening game >>

  The fluctuation time shortening game (the above-mentioned time reduction) generally shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. is there. Here, “generally shorten” does not mean that the time is shorter than the normal game in all cases. This may include a case where the length is longer than a part of the variation pattern. According to this time saving, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if the winning in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) is generated continuously, the special symbol is kept. The change display and the stop display of the symbol can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many chances of the big hit lottery per unit time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the duration of the time reduction state (time reduction period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol has changed, similarly to the probability change state. In this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100).

  In the present embodiment, the probable change period and the shortening period are set to the same period, but the probable change period and the shortening period may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the probable change period to 104 times and the shortening period to 100 times. In addition, neither the probable change period nor the shortened period is limited to being constant. For example, it is possible to set the probable change period to one of four times, 25 times, 100 times, and the like according to the type of the big hit that has occurred. In addition, the time reduction period can be any one of 20, 40, 60, 100, etc., depending on the type of the big hit that has occurred. Further, a specific game state may be provided in which only the above-mentioned easy ball entry state (the easy winning state) is performed without time reduction.

  It is also possible to provide a so-called drop lottery function. The following can be exemplified as the drop lottery. For example, after the certainty change or the time saving reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) smaller than the above-mentioned maximum number of changes (here, 100 times), every time the special symbol changes until the maximum number of changes is reached, A lottery (special game end lottery) for determining whether to end the probable change or the reduction of time is executed. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next fluctuation returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is not limited to executing both the probability change and the time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of the specific games. For example, depending on the type of the hit jackpot, it is possible that only the time saving is given and no probability change is given, or the time saving is not given and only the probability variation is given.
<< Easy ball entry game >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. This ball entry facilitation game is a game state in which the opening state of the second start winning port 63 can be more easily accepting game balls than usual. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 63 has the opening and closing blades, and normally performs the opening operation for a predetermined time when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit state. Then, when the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the time savings related to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuations related to the ordinary symbol, the control mode such as the extension of the opening of the normal electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes, The ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy entry state (also referred to as an easy winning state) is formed.

  Of the above-described various control modes in the ordinary symbol, the time reduction related to the ordinary symbol is a control mode in which the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter than the normal state, and the probability variation related to the ordinary symbol is the hit probability of the ordinary symbol. Is a control mode (probable change related to a normal symbol) that improves the normal state. Further, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second starting winning opening 63 is made longer than the short opening at the normal time (at the time of a non-specific game) to perform the long opening.

  As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game in the present embodiment uses the three functions of the normal symbol time saving, the probability variation of the open lottery, and the open extension of the normal electric accessory, and the second start winning opening. Increase the ease of entry into 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second starting winning opening 63. Further, a configuration may be employed in which switching between a period in which at least one of the three functions is performed and a period in which at least one of the functions is not performed is performed according to a game state.

  The continuation period of such a ball entry facilitation game can be determined based on a short time period relating to a special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the game for facilitating entry is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the game for facilitating entry is terminated when the time reduction related to the special symbol ends. In such a case, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the time reduction of the special symbol ends is provided for the ordinary time (at the time of the non-specific game). It can be determined from the fluctuation patterns that have been used.

  Further, such an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory in the easy ball entry state at the time of the specific game (opening mode at the time of the specific game) is referred to as "long opening at the time of specific game" or "long opening at the time of short time". It is possible. As a specific mode of the long opening at the time of the specific game, a continuous opening mode in which the opening period from the start to the end of the opening by one opening of, for example, about 5 seconds can be exemplified.

  As another mode, there is an intermittent open mode in which the open period from the start to the end of the open is constituted by a plurality of opens. As the intermittent opening mode, for example, a total of, e.g., 5.32 seconds, 1.60 seconds, and 1.60 seconds is interposed by an interval time for once closing the state between the opening times. An example in which an open time of 52 (= 2.32 + 1.60 + 1.60) seconds is secured can be exemplified. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to this, an opening pattern based on a combination of opening times of 2.96 seconds, 1.14 seconds, and 1.56 seconds, 1.14 seconds, 1.60 seconds, and 1.60 seconds An opening pattern based on a combination of each opening time of seconds and 1.14 seconds is also provided.

  In addition, it is also possible to select which of the above-described continuous opening mode and the intermittent opening mode is to be executed by lottery, or to randomly select which of the various intermittent opening modes is to be executed. Further, in the intermittent opening mode, a part or all of each opening time may be configured by an extremely short opening time, for example, 0.5 seconds.

More specifically, for example, it is possible to repeat the opening of 0.5 seconds three times with an interval time of once being in the closed state intervening to secure a total opening time of 1.5 seconds. Such an extremely short-time opening that prevents the ball from entering the second starting winning opening 63 can be referred to as “specific game short opening” or “time opening short opening”. In addition, the intermittent opening mode by the combination of the short opening at the time of the specific game, such as the opening mode in which the opening of 1.5 seconds in total is secured, may be referred to as, for example, the “intermittent opening mode by the combination of the short opening”. It is possible.
<Main production on pachinko machines>
<< Basic display style of effect design >>

  Next, main effects of various effects performed by the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 based on a command from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. Here, first, a basic display mode of the above-described effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) will be described.

  The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 with the first special symbol or the second special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7B). . That is, the effect symbol 190 is displayed in a fluctuating manner in accordance with the fluctuating time defined by the fluctuating pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the fluctuating time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is produced in accordance with the end. A series of operations such as the end of the variable display of the symbol 190 is a basic display mode.

  The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect symbol 190 is constituted by a combination of three symbols of a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. When the result of the jackpot lottery on the main board 102 is a jackpot, a combination of three symbols, such as “777” or “555”, is a stop symbol representing the jackpot. Is displayed. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is unsuccessful, for example, one part or all of the effect symbols are rendered in a different combination from other effect symbols, such as “767”, “928”, “331”, etc. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed. Note that FIG. 7B illustrates a situation where the combination of the effect symbols 190 is a combination of "331".

  Here, “stop symbol” and “stop symbol” in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are “fixed stop”. In other words, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination of, for example, “767” and “928”, it is only “determined stop”. It does not correspond to what has been done. A state in which the effect symbols 190 do not reach the “fixed stop” while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

  As a display form of such a “temporary stop”, for example, a state where the effect symbol 190 is vibrating (swaying) little by little can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbols 190 are wiggling little by little while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a "shaking fluctuation" mode or the like. Examples of the mode of the swing of the effect symbol 190 at the “temporary stop” include vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotation, and the like, and a movement range of about several millimeters.

  In addition, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “fixed stop”, a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination after a temporary stop state can be exemplified. Further, at the time of the “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination has been stopped. Then, as an effect indicating that the finalized display has been performed, the state of the finalized stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the display area 194 in which the finalized and stopped effect design 190 is displayed is temporarily blackened ( After the so-called blackout), the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped again appears again. It is also conceivable that the above-described blackout effect is performed only in a predetermined case (for example, when super reach 3 is executed).

  In addition, in the above-described “reach” display mode, there may be a case where an effect symbol maintaining a combination of reach is displayed in the above-mentioned “temporary stop” mode. Then, after the reach display by the “temporary stop”, the symbol that has been variably displayed (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) constitutes a combination of misses (combination of the miss reach) and “temporarily stops”. It is possible to exemplify an effect in which the “fixed stop” is performed and the variable display is ended while maintaining the state. Further, from the state where the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are performing "temporary stop" by the combination of the off-reach, the medium effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect has high reliability (the reliability of the big hit). Production with a relatively high degree).

  Note that the scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-described vertical scroll, and various display modes can be adopted. As another display mode, for example, a mode in which the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around a vertical axis to perform variable display can be exemplified. Further, for example, a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are sequentially fed out while being enlarged along a linear or curved trajectory from the back to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front in the display area 194. And the like. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front falls from the upper side to the lower side.

  Although illustration is omitted, the arrangement of the right effect symbol 190c from the left effect symbol 190a is changed in the vertical direction, and the effect symbol 190 may be configured by an upper effect symbol, a medium effect symbol, and a lower effect symbol. . In this case, a display mode in which the element symbols of these effect symbols are moved (horizontal scrolling) in a horizontal direction (for example, from left to right) can also be exemplified.

  Further, a plurality of the above-described various scroll display modes may be provided in a single model of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and the various scroll display modes may be selectively used depending on the effect patterns and the effect modes.

  FIGS. 7A and 7B illustrate a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the display area 194 in the vertical direction. There is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of active lines may be set to five. In the variable display mode in which the vertical scroll is performed as in the present embodiment, when the display mode of 5 lines is adopted, the 5 lines are the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left up diagonal. It is composed of lines.

  In the variable display mode (horizontal scroll) in which the horizontal scrolling is performed as described above, when the display mode of five lines is adopted, the five lines are a left line, a middle line, a right line, and a diagonally rising line. , And an oblique line that rises to the left.

  Further, in FIG. 7B, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are shown in a simplified manner using only predetermined characters, but the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are represented by numerals or the like. It can be constituted by a combination of a part meaning a predetermined symbol (the element design which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect design) and a part consisting of a pattern representing other than the predetermined symbol (the element design which is a non-symbol element effect design). It is possible. And, as the portion composed of a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol, various design images and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified. It is also possible to use

  Further, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are provided with a plurality of sets of element symbols, and can be properly used depending on the situation. In this case, for example, each of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c is provided with a plurality of sets of element symbols representing the meanings of the numbers "1" to "9". During execution of a certain effect mode, the corresponding element symbols of “1” to “9” are used, and during execution of another certain effect mode, the corresponding “1” to “9” are used. It is possible to use the element design of “9”.

  It should be noted that the above-described differences in the effect modes can be distinguished by, for example, differences in scenes and situations in the effects displayed on the effect display device 60. Further, differences in scenes and situations in the effect are distinguished by differences in effect contents such as, for example, the background, scene, characters, action of the characters, and cut-in mode displayed on the effect display device 60. Is possible.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the various display modes described above, and various other display modes can be adopted. For example, the transparency of the image of the effect symbol 190 can be made higher than before so as to make it invisible during a predetermined period from the start of the change of the effect symbol 190 to the stop display.

In the case where the effect design 190 is made invisible in this way, although illustration is omitted, the effect design 190 is made transparent to the extent that the effect design 190 cannot be visually recognized, and instead of the effect design 190, the first special design or the second special design is used. It is also possible to display a symbol (proxy symbol) indicating the status of the symbol. As the substitute design, there can be exemplified a design in which only symbols such as numbers are displayed in a variable size and stopped at the corners of the display area 194 in a smaller size than the symbol component effect design of the effect design 190. Further, depending on the situation, both the substitute symbol and the effect symbol 190 may be displayed at the same time.
<< Example of effect pattern >>

  Next, the above-described effect patterns will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state of being linked to a variation pattern determined by the main substrate 102. Further, in the effect pattern, the mode of the effect including the effect symbol 190 is defined. More specifically, in the effect pattern, an effect process such as a change process from a change start to a change stop for the selected effect symbol 190 and a background and story development displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190 are defined. I have. Then, there are effects patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

  Among these, when the effect pattern of “with reach” is executed, a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, medium effect symbol 190b) is arranged is performed on the effect display device 60. Then, when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the matching pattern such as “777” or “333” according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped. In addition, when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery relating to the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been definitely stopped.

  Furthermore, when the effect pattern of "no reach" is executed, for example, a combination without reach, such as "928" or "331", in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a combination of reach, It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

  Some of these effect patterns have various lengths of fluctuation time, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of “with reach” includes a pattern that has a fluctuation time of several minutes. In the present embodiment, the no-reach effect corresponding to “no reach”, “normal reach”, and “super reach” in the variation patterns (see FIGS. 10A to 10D) related to the special symbols described above. A pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern are provided. The effect using the effect symbol 190 as described above may be referred to as a sub-variation pattern. And, to these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are linked to one variation pattern determined on the main substrate 102, and the number of effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described variation pattern. ing. In addition, in these effect patterns, as an effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 separately from the sub-variation pattern, there are a reserved effect display and various announcement effects as described later, and these are combined with the sub-variation pattern. Sometimes used.

In addition, these reach can be divided into “strong reach” having a relatively high jackpot reliability and “weak reach” having a relatively low jackpot reliability. It is possible to make "reach" a "strong reach". Further, “strong reach” and “weak reach” may be provided in “super reach”.
<< Display of pending effects related to special symbols >>

  Next, a hold display (hold effect display) related to a special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), a first number-of-reserved-number display section 196 indicating the number of retained lottery values in the first game, A second holding number display section 197 indicating the holding number of the winning / failure lottery value in the two games is displayed. Here, for the sake of simplicity of description and illustration, each hold display is represented by a perfect circle, but the hold display may be performed by, for example, displaying crystals, jewels, or other predetermined items. . Further, the hold display may be performed by, for example, displaying a person or an animal.

  In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Various forms of the hold display can be adopted as described above. Here, it is assumed that a blue item is displayed as a basic hold display. Further, when the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the reserved number reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, four reserved displays are performed on the first reserved number display section 196.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first reserved number display section 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost part of the first reserved number display section 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, hereinafter, the hold displays performed from the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as “hold 1”, “hold 2”, “hold 3”, and “hold 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, while the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed, and no hold display is being performed on the first hold number display unit 196, a hold occurs. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (the position of the above-mentioned “hold 1”). Then, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and "hold 2" to "hold 4" have not occurred. As described above, when the holding is further performed in the state where the “hold 1” is generated, the display related to the generated holding is performed at the position of the “hold 2” on the left side of the “hold 1”. Then, when “hold 1” and “hold 2” are displayed, and “hold 3” and “hold 4” are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, “hold 3” is displayed in accordance with the number of held holds. Or “Protection 4” is displayed.

  Then, if the fluctuation display that has been executed when the “hold 1” occurs is ended, and the other change start conditions relating to the first game are also satisfied, the above-mentioned hold storage information regarding the “hold 1” is displayed. At the stage of digestion, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the right side of the first hold number display section 196. The change information display section 195 is provided on the right side of the first reserved number display section 196. The change information display section 195 is an area for displaying information (the change information) related to the change display being executed at that time. In other words, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

  Here, the size, color, and form related to the item are displayed when the hold display of “Hold 1” is moved to the change information display unit 195, or when the change display of the effect symbol 190 being executed is changing or stopped. The display element may be changed such as. In the examples of FIGS. 7A and 7B, the size is enlarged when changing the hold display of “hold 1” to the change information display 198.

  As described above, when the hold display at “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display moves up, and “hold 2” shifts to the position of “hold 1”. Further, when "hold 3" and "hold 4" exist, "hold 3" is shifted to the position of "hold 2", and "hold 4" is shifted to the position of "hold 3". Then, when further suspension occurs in such a situation, “suspension 4” newly occurs, and the number of suspensions reaches the upper limit. If a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the standby order of each hold is raised.

  It should be noted that it is possible to broadly grasp the effect as a hold effect, including the state in which the change display is changed from the hold display in “Ba 1” to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195, but is not limited thereto. It is also possible to handle such that the display up to the hold display in “hold 1” is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of suspensions is 0 and there is a ball in the first starting winning opening 62, the display of “Ba 1” is not performed, and the fluctuation information is not displayed. The change information display 198 is directly performed on the display unit 195. Only in such a case, it is also possible to perform such a treatment that the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the suspension display.

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned second reserved number display section 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first reserved number display section 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second hold number display section 197 is located on the opposite side of the first hold number display section 196 (the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display section 195 interposed therebetween. ).

  Further, when a hold related to the second game occurs, a predetermined hold display is displayed on the second hold number display unit 197. Various forms of the hold display can be adopted as in the case of the first hold number display section 196, but here, unlike the first hold number display section 196, an orange item is used as a basic hold display. Is displayed. Furthermore, when the number of suspensions increases, a suspension display is added, and when the suspension number reaches the upper limit, four suspension displays are performed in the second suspension number display unit 197 as shown in FIG. 7A.

  The second number-of-reserves display section 197 also includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the leftmost portion of the second-remaining-number display section 197 viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the right end. Further, with respect to the second game, it is possible to display “Hold 1” on the left end to “Hold 4” on the right end, and the holding display is shifted in descending order as the holding is exhausted. Then, when the hold display in the “hold 1” at the left end of the second hold number display section 197 is used up, the change information display section 195 is displayed as in the case of the first hold number display section 196 when the hold is exhausted. To move to.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 and the display mode of the change information display 198 on the change information display unit 195 are not limited to still images. It may be a predetermined moving image. Further, the display mode of the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 and the second hold number display section 197 may be such that a still image changes to a moving image or a moving image changes to a still image at a predetermined timing. Good.

  Further, the hold display can be performed in a mode according to various game states. For example, it is possible to exemplify a case where the hold display mode is different between the case where the jackpot lottery probability is the normal probability and the case where the jackpot lottery is the high probability. When the hold display mode is changed according to the game state, the start or end of the change related to the hold display can be delayed or advanced with respect to the timing at which the corresponding game state occurs. It is.

  Further, the positional relationship between the first hold number display section 196, the second hold number display section 197, and the change information display section 195 is not limited to the above, and various display modes can be adopted. is there. For example, in the first hold number display section 196 in FIG. 7A, the second hold number display section 197 is moved to the left as viewed from the player, and eight hold displays are displayed on the left side of the change information display section 195. They may be arranged side by side. As another example, when the time-saving game state and the easy ball entry state are set as the game state, the second hold is displayed only in consideration of the fact that the second hold is often preferentially completed without interruption. May be performed.

  Such a mode of the hold display does not execute the second game in preference to the first game as in the present embodiment, but executes special symbols and effects in the order of occurrence of the start winning prize related to the first game and the second game. It is conceivable that the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine of the type that displays the symbol 190 in a variable manner. Further, as described above, when the first number-of-suspended-number display unit 196 and the second number-of-suspended-number display unit 197 are continuously arranged, the position of the change information display unit 195 is, For example, a portion on the lower right side can be exemplified.

  In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display units including a large display unit and a small display unit, for example, the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 , And any or all of the fluctuation information display unit 195 may be displayed on a small display.

In the present embodiment, a preview effect using the above-mentioned hold display or the change information display 198 may be performed, but these preview effects will be described later.
<< Pending pre-reading effects related to special symbols >>

  Next, a reservation look-ahead effect that is one of the announcement effects related to the special symbols will be described. In the following, the “suspended prefetch effect” may be simply referred to as “prefetch effect”. This look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned on-hold storage information (the first special-figure on-hold storage information or the second on-hold storage information). Further, in the pre-reading effect, using the function of the above-described advance information notification, a reach or a big hit occurs with respect to a hold in which digestion is performed later than the effect performed using the effect design 190 or the like at that time. It is executed as an effect to notify the degree of expectation of the thing.

  For example, unlike the display in blue, which is the above-described basic display mode, the green display is performed for the hold display generated at the position of “hold 3” in the first hold number display unit 196 described above. This indicates that the degree of expectation such as occurrence of reach is higher than that in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to blue and green colors, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern are provided. Productions such as showing that the degree is high are being performed.

  Here, examples of the display mode of the “predetermined pattern” include an animal pattern such as a giraffe pattern and a display mode including a predetermined character image. It is also possible to adopt not only the colors and patterns of the hold display, but also items, person images, character strings, etc. other than the perfect circular shape. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a pre-reading effect by combining the various display modes described above with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed, and an additional object (for example, display of a burning flame effect). In addition, the hold that has been awarded to the pre-reading effect can be referred to as, for example, “trigger hold” or “the hold”.

  The pre-reading effect related to the hold described above may be performed also in the second game. As for the second game, a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern can be provided in addition to the basic color orange as described above. Also, as the hold display related to the second game, it is possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle, a person image, or the like.

  Furthermore, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change”. Examples of such “hold changes” include those that indicate a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold, those that indicate a change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, and the like. is there.

  Among these, as the one indicating the change of the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold is started and the hold display is started, the use of the hold progresses, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example in which the hold display changes while proceeding to “hold 1” can be exemplified. Then, for example, when a hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of “hold 3”, and when the player moves to the position of “hold 1”, another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

In addition, for both the first game and the second game, when the hold display moves from “hold 1” to the change information display section 195 and becomes the change information display 198, for example, the display is performed in the basic color. From a certain blue or orange color, to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern, or to a display mode such as an item or a person image other than a perfect circular shape, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be represented. is there. Since the second game is generally performed only in the advantageous game state (time saving, easy entry), a disadvantageous display indicating the possibility of the end of the advantageous game state may be displayed.
<< Control mode related to pending prefetching effect >>

  Further, examples of the control mode relating to the above-mentioned suspension change include the following. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern of the hold change (hold change pattern) is performed. A hold change pattern table is used for the hold change pattern lottery. The hold change pattern table includes information on whether or not a hold change has been made, and what timing is required when a hold change is performed (when a hold change is present). Stipulates matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is executed. Further, as the pending change pattern, a pattern for the first game and a pattern for the second game are defined.

  Further, examples of the pending change pattern with a pending change that can be selected by the above-described pending change pattern lottery include the following. For example, regarding the first game, three hold displays from “hold 1” to “hold 3” have already been performed, a new hold has occurred, and the hold display has been performed at the position of “hold 4”. And At this time, the hold display of the blue color, which is the basic color, is performed, and thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbols 190 is sequentially terminated, and the standby order related to the hold is raised.

  Furthermore, the hold display that was in “hold 4” is sequentially shifted to “hold 3”, “hold 2”, and “hold 1”, and a hold change is performed each time this shift is performed. Then, the color of the hold display changes from blue at the position of “ho 4” to green at the position of “ho 3”, red at the position of “ho 2”, and gold at the position of “ho 1”. The color sequentially changes to the rainbow color on the information display section 195 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). In other words, as the waiting order related to the hold is advanced, the hold display changes to a display mode in which the big hit reliability is high. Such a suspension change pattern can be referred to as performing a suspension change every time the display position changes.

  Further, as another hold change pattern, for example, as in the above-described example, when the hold display is performed on “hold 4”, the display is blue, and the display of this basic color is “hold 2”. Until it is displayed at the position. Then, when the hold display moves to “hold 1”, the display mode changes to red or rainbow. Such a pending change pattern can be referred to as one in which the pending change does not occur until the pending display is approaching and the pending display reaches the predetermined display position of “Ba 1”.

  It should be noted that the above-described various pending change patterns are merely examples, and various other modes can be provided in the above-described pending change pattern table.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of holdings in the “holding 1” to the “holding 4” that correspond to the holding change, it is possible to cancel any one of the prefetch effects. More specifically, for example, when “hold 4” occurs, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the hold that has occurred earlier is If the suspension change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the suspension related to the above-mentioned “storage 4” can be exemplified such that the suspension change is canceled and not executed.

Further, for example, when “hold 4” occurs as in the above-described example, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has occurred earlier occur. However, if the change does not change to the rainbow color and changes only to green or the like, the change that has occurred earlier is canceled and not executed. In addition, the lottery relating to the pre-holding is not limited to the time of winning, but at the start of a new change, that is, at the time of the completion of the preservation, from the preservation from the preservation 1 to the preservation N (here, N is a natural number of 2 or more) to the preservation to be the target. May be selected, and a lottery may be executed. In the present embodiment, the lottery process is determined by the main board 102 at the time of winning, and the information (advance notification information) relating to the value of the random number, the symbol random number, and the variable pattern random number transmitted is used as an argument. I want to run.
<< Continuous notice for special symbols >>

  Next, as another effect pattern, a continuous announcement (continuous effect) related to a special symbol will be described. There are two types of continuous announcements: genuine ones and pseudo ones. Of these, genuine continuous announcements mean that a continuous announcement effect is made over a plurality of variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that, for one change display relating to the special symbol, an intermittent notice effect such as a plurality of changes in the special symbol is performed.

  The “continuous announcement” in the present embodiment is different from a normal production that can be performed most often in the case of a jackpot lottery being missed, in that a special production that gives some advancement is performed more than once. It is meant to be done. In addition, the “directive with special features” includes scene patterns with a relatively low frequency of appearance compared to directing patterns with reach, or normal scene settings with the highest frequency of appearance or performance patterns that include characters. And effect patterns including characters and characters.

  More specifically, as the “continuous notice”, more specifically, for example, the effect of the pattern of the same system (stop the effect symbol 190 of the same color that is not the same color every time) is repeated every predetermined number of times related to the special symbol. And the like). In addition, as the “continuous notice” of other aspects, for example, the character acting as the main character in the story of the production changes sequentially for each change related to the special symbol, aiming at the room that is the final arrival purpose. Examples of moving to a room can be exemplified (special stage notice). In another mode of "continuous notice", the character as the main character battles with a different enemy and wins for each change related to the special symbol, aiming at the enemy which is the final goal. Can be illustrated (Battle Mission Notice, Battle Zone Notice).

  Further, the aforementioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be performed based on advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received in the case where the “holding 3” has been suspended, the sub-main board 301 is set as the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after the next. It is possible to select a content that includes a continuous notice over three variable displays.

  Then, when the hold of one time is exhausted and the hold of “ho 3” is shifted to the position of “ho 2”, the first first of the effect patterns related to the selected consecutive announcements The effect pattern according to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially consumed and the hold display moves from “Ho 2” to “Ho 1”, the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information display from “Ho 1” is performed. When the process moves to the section 195, the last third notice is executed.

  In addition, in the sub main board 301, the change pattern related to the change display executed at the time when the above-mentioned “hold 3” is held, or the “hold 2” or “hold 1” that has occurred before that. It is also possible to check such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned “hold 3” is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with a high hit reliability is executed or a hit is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the effect pattern is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous announcement selected when the hold of “Hold 3” occurs.

  Here, the above-described effect form of the pending change may be one aspect of the effect according to the continuous notice.

  In addition, as the pseudo continuous notice described above (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pseudo continuous notice”), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the single fluctuation display of the special symbol. Such a thing or a thing in which a character repeats an act a plurality of times can be exemplified.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous notice described above is merely an example, and various contents other than those described above can be adopted as the content of the continuous notice.
<<< Direction design related to normal design >>

  Next, the effects related to the above-described ordinary symbols will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display for the ordinary symbols is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect relating to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. In the case where the effect display of the ordinary symbol is performed in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that a loss and a hit type can be identified, for example.

  More specifically, for example, as shown by a general-purpose effect display unit 199 in FIGS. 7A and 7B, two square frames each having a size of several millimeters are displayed side by side, and the inside of each frame is displayed. It can be displayed in red or blue. Then, when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery related to the normal symbol is a loss, for example, both frames are displayed in blue, and this is set as a lost symbol related to the normal symbol. In addition, if the result of the winning or losing lottery for a normal symbol is one of the hits, one or both of the two frames are displayed in red according to the type of the hit, and these are displayed for the normal symbol. And the like.

In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of displays such as a large display and a small display, the effect design (199) related to the ordinary design is, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on an appropriate display body. In addition, for example, a set of two LED display lamps may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect symbol display device for a normal symbol.
<< Display of pending effects on normal symbols >>

Next, a description will be given of the hold effect display related to the above-described ordinary symbols. In the present embodiment, the holding effect display for the ordinary symbols is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the hold effect display related to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of displays such as a large display and a small display, the effect hold display related to a normal symbol is, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp, which is a set of two, is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, whereby the effect display of the number of reserves related to the ordinary symbols “1” to “4” is performed. Is also good.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, effects related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effects”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the effect pattern described above. Further, the limited frequency effect pattern effect is an effect based on a pattern set so as to easily appear in a predetermined game state. The content of the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content that indicates a specific tendency, and examples of the content of the limited frequency pattern effect include, for example, those that stimulate the expectation that a highly reliable reach will occur. In addition, some effect patterns related to the limited frequency effect pattern effect may include an effect pattern related to reach.

  Further, examples of the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear include, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed, during a predetermined effect mode, immediately after the end of a special game, during a specific game, and the like. it can. In addition to the above, examples of the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear include a case where the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four). .

  The following can be exemplified as a control mode relating to such a limited frequency pattern effect. For example, the above-described variation pattern table on the main board 102 includes a plurality of variation patterns (limited frequency variation patterns) associated with limited frequency pattern effects. Then, a limited frequency pattern table is formed in part of the variation pattern table by the plurality of limited frequency variation patterns.

  As described above, this limited frequency pattern table is used in a predetermined game situation such as at the start of a game, immediately after the end of a special game, or for a predetermined period after a change of a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. Then, it is determined whether or not the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern table should be used on the main board 102. Further, in a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern table should be used, the selection range of the variation pattern on the main board 102 is limited to the limited frequency pattern table, and the variation pattern in the limited frequency pattern table (the limited frequency variation pattern). ) Is selected.

  Subsequently, a command including information on the selected variation pattern is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301, and the effect pattern associated with the selected variation pattern is determined on the sub-main board 301. You.

  The variation pattern in the limited frequency pattern table on the main board 102 may include a variation pattern not associated with the limited frequency pattern effect (non-limited frequency variation pattern). By doing so, when the non-limited frequency fluctuation pattern is selected, a limited frequency pattern effect may not appear even in the above-mentioned predetermined game situation.

  In addition, even in the above-described predetermined game situation, it is possible to make the appearance rate of the limited frequency pattern effect different for each game situation. As such a control mode, for example, at the start of the game, a limited frequency pattern effect is executed at a rate of 100%, immediately after other predetermined effect patterns are executed, during a predetermined effect mode, immediately after the end of the special game. During a specific game, a limited frequency pattern effect is not executed. Further, when the limited frequency table to be used after the end of the special game is determined, control may be performed so as to be different depending on the game state before the execution of the special game. According to this, it is easy to reach when the player first enters the time-saving game and the easy-to-enter state, and at the time of the big hit during the time-saving game (so-called extended play), a table that reduces the reach frequency by giving priority to the fluctuation efficiency is given. You can also select it.

  The determination as to whether or not the game is started as described above is made by, for example, detecting the presence / absence of an operation related to the firing handle 20 by the main board 102, and for a predetermined time (for example, about one minute). When the operation of the firing handle 20 is detected after that, the operation can be performed by determining that the game has started.

  It is also possible to determine whether to execute the limited frequency pattern effect on the side of the sub main board 301. In this case, for example, in the sub-main board 301, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effect pattern is executed, or whether or not a predetermined effect mode is being performed. Alternatively, it is possible to execute a limited-frequency pattern effect when in a predetermined effect mode.

In the case where a small hit is adopted as the hit type as in this embodiment, for example, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) starts to change after the occurrence of the small hit, the main board It is also possible to determine the variation pattern by referring to the limited frequency pattern table in 102. Furthermore, it is also possible to continuously perform a limited frequency pattern effect in a variable display related to a plurality of special symbols (for example, 10 or 20 times) after the occurrence of a small hit. In addition, a difference regarding the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect is provided for the first game and the second game. For example, the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect is set to 10 for the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is provided. With regard to, the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect may be set to 20 times. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the reference pattern of the limited frequency after the end of the special game different according to the winning symbol. More specifically, for example, a limited frequency pattern table A and a limited frequency pattern table B different from each other are provided. (A) In the case of a predetermined winning symbol, the limited frequency pattern table A and the limited frequency pattern table B are arranged in this order. 10 times are used alternately until the number of changes reaches a total of 100 times. (A) In the case of another winning symbol, the order is changed, and the limited frequency pattern table B and the limited frequency pattern table A are changed in this order. It is also possible to control such that 10 times are used alternately until the number reaches 100 times in total.
<<< Direction related to long opening of the 2nd starting winning opening >>>

  Next, the effects related to the long opening described above will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect (effect for long opening) related to the long opening of the second start winning opening 63 in normal time (normally long opening) is executed using the effect display device 60, the speaker 21, and the like. There are cases. Then, as a long opening effect related to the normal long opening, an opening lottery effect indicating whether or not the normal long opening is executed, and a long opening effect executed corresponding to the result of the opening lottery effect. (Open lottery result effect). In the following, the normal long opening may be simply referred to as “long opening”.

  Among these, as the open lottery effect, for example, during the change of the ordinary symbol or at the stage before the start of the change, an effect of contents for stimulating the expectation that the normal time opening will be performed can be exemplified. More specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not a specific character appears in the lower corner of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 and the area for displaying the above-mentioned second reserved number display section 197 can be secured. An example in which the state is displayed as a moving image can be exemplified.

  Such an effect pattern does not directly display the state of the lottery, but can also be expressed as “opening effect”, “stage effect before opening”, and the like. Then, in the effect contents, for example, when the purpose is achieved, the long opening is performed, and when the purpose is not achieved, the long opening is not performed thereafter. When an additional display is provided as described above, an open lottery effect can be performed on this additional display.

  In addition to the above-described effect patterns, it is possible to employ a type that directly displays the state of the lottery. Examples of such direct open lottery effects include, for example, those that display moving images related to a lottery such as roulette, fortune, or two-digit symbol matching. Furthermore, in the case of hitting the normal long opening in the hit lottery relating to the above-mentioned ordinary symbols, an opening lottery effect of the content indicating the hit is executed, and if it is not hitting the normal long opening, it will be lost. It is conceivable that an open lottery effect having the content of "?" Is executed.

  In addition, open lottery productions that show contents that do not fulfill the purpose or that do not achieve the purpose do not normally hit the long open, and if the production pattern related to the open lottery production is selected with a predetermined probability Be executed. Further, the effect pattern related to the open lottery effect at the loss may be selected on the main board 102 or independently on the sub main board 301. In the present embodiment, the open lottery effect is executed with a high probability (for example, 100%) when the normal long opening is executed, and a low probability (when the normal long opening is not executed). (For example, about 0.1%).

  Further, it is possible to variously set the relationship between the content of the open lottery effect and the open pattern of the second start winning opening 63. For example, an effect using roulette is adopted as the content of the open lottery effect, and "open", "x", "chance", "reach", and the like are assigned to options provided as eyes of roulette. Then, when the normal long opening is not hit, a state in which “×” is selected as the content of the opening lottery effect is displayed, and the second starting winning opening 63 is not opened, or only the short opening is performed. To do.

  Furthermore, when the normal long opening is hit, an effect of selecting “open” on the roulette is executed, and the long opening is always performed. In addition, in addition to the above, in the production according to the production design 190, when the production of the content that develops in stages or the production of the content that develops to the super reach is performed, the roulette relating to the open lottery production uses “ It is conceivable that a state in which "chance" or "reach" is selected is displayed, and the second starting winning opening 63 is not opened, or only the short opening is performed.

  In addition, the long opening effect composed of the above-described opening lottery effect (the above-described opening fanning effect and the stage effect before opening) and an effect indicating the presence or absence of the long opening (opening lottery result effect) is provided by the second starting winning opening 63. Although it is positioned as a special effect related to normal long opening, it is directly related to the control mode in which the long opening and the opening lottery result effect are directly related. There is no control mode.

  Among them, the control mode in which the direct association is performed is a mode in which a command related to the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301, and the direct connection is performed. The control mode in which no attachment is performed is a mode in which the effect for long opening is executed on the side of the sub main board 301 without grasping the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63. In the present embodiment, a control mode in which a long opening and a long opening effect are directly related to each other is adopted for a long opening effect, but a control mode in which a direct connection is not performed is adopted. It is also possible to include them in the department.

  In addition, such a long opening effect may be performed in connection with the above-mentioned holding of the ordinary symbol. That is, the holding lottery value related to the ordinary symbol is preliminarily determined during the holding, and a long opening effect having a meaning such as a notice or a fan may be executed with a predetermined probability in accordance with the result of the predetermination. Such a preliminary announcement effect based on the preliminary determination is included in the above-mentioned “pre-reading effect”. Such a look-ahead effect on a normal symbol can be performed in the same manner as a look-ahead effect on a special symbol, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the advance notice information on the passage of the operating port (68a or 68b) is provided. (Ordinary symbol prefetch command) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern is selected for the effect for long opening regardless of the number of holds, but is not limited to this, and when the number of holds is large, for example, the effect time is short. The effect pattern of the effect for long opening may be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect”) using the above-described operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be described. The operation button 22 is operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player a feeling that he or she is participating in the effect of the game or the lottery. . As the button effect, for example, in the process of changing the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), “Push” and “continuous tapping” are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. For example, guide display for prompting an operation, such as characters such as "Let's press and hold" or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time of the operation validity period, can be exemplified.

  Further, as the button effects, when the player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, an effect in which a character makes a comment or an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character can be exemplified. In addition, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member 93 or the like is operated to notify the user of the reach. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect. In this case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member 93 or the like is activated to stimulate expectations for a big hit.

  Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button effect. The button operation validity period is a preset fixed time.

  The operation button 22 is combined with a vibration motor (not shown) to vibrate the operation button 22 or, for example, the operating range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor, and the operation button 22 is It is also possible to adopt an effect mode such as a squat. Further, when the operation button 22 is protruded and retracted, the protruding amount can be set relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

The operation buttons 22 are not limited to those having a small external dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and may have a hemispherical form having about ten and several centimeters. Further, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other types of operation input devices can be adopted. For example, an operation handle of a car, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character related to the contents of the effect. A (figure), dial (dial) type operation unit, a touch panel type operation unit also serving as an image display unit, and the like can be adopted. In addition, it is also possible to provide a relatively small operation button 22 and an operation lever or the like in the form of an operation lever, and to use the operation button 22 properly depending on the situation such as the effect contents.
<< Direction when a big hit occurs >>

  Next, a description will be given of an effect when a big hit occurs. The effects in the event of a big hit include effects before the start of the special game, effects during the special game, effects after the special game, and the like. Among these effects, the effects before the special game include the effects when the combination of the effects symbols 190 are determined (when the symbols are determined), the effects when the effects of the effect symbols are stopped (while the symbols are being determined), and the effect of right-hand guidance. It is included.

  Then, as an effect at the time of symbol confirmation, for example, the aforementioned effect symbol 190 is displayed while maintaining a combination of big hits such as “111” and “777 (corresponding to maximum profit per hit)”, and thereafter, the big hit of the effect symbol 190 Are re-drawn by lottery to maintain the combinations of "111" and "777" or to change (promote) the combination of "111" to the combination of "777". In addition, as the effect during the design decision, for example, the content of stopping the design symbol 190 and continuing to display the combination of the design symbol 190 with the combination of “111” or “777” described above can be exemplified. Further, as an effect of the right-handed guidance, an example of a content that guides the player to perform a right-handed operation for increasing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 and facilitating the winning in the large winning opening 92 can be exemplified.

  Examples of the effects during the special game described above include a moving image having contents that cannot be viewed unless the player has won the big hit. At this time, a predetermined music is output from the above-described speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as the video during the special game, for example, a picture depicting a state in which a predetermined character in a play picture employed in the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 fights a rival enemy or a state of enjoying fortune Can be exemplified.

  More specifically, for example, when opening the big winning opening in the first round in a special game, the characters start fighting, and from the second round to the last round, the switching of the rounds and the characters When the battle of the characters is continued and the final round is completed and the special winning opening is closed, the fight between the characters ends. The switching of the round during the special game is performed by, for example, “1R”, “2R”,... At the corner (for example, the upper right corner) of the display area 194 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). , "15R", and "16R". Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is also possible to display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hit continues.

  Further, in this embodiment, all types of big hits are accompanied by benefits such as certainty changes and time savings. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a big hit without certainty changes can be provided. If the type of jackpot includes a jackpot without a probability change, the notification of whether or not the probability will change after the end of the special game should not be reported during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

  For example, when a special game of a total of 16 rounds is performed, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the player has won a certain change is not performed until the end of the 10th round. When the first ball entry to the winning opening 91 (or the second winning opening 92) is detected, if the player is hitting a certain change, an effect to that effect is performed. Is possible.

  Similarly, in a pachinko machine including a jackpot without a probability change, before a special game starts, during a special game, or at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area It is also possible to adopt an effect or a control mode in which is changed.

  In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a detection region for game balls (herein referred to as a “V ball entry device”) may be used as a portion of the game region 52 (see FIG. 1) below the second large winning opening 92. Is provided in addition to. Further, at a predetermined timing, such as at the end of a special game, the V-ball apparatus is set to a state in which game balls can be accepted, and in this state, if a V-ball apparatus detects a game ball, the probability state thereafter becomes , For a predetermined period. When the game ball does not enter the V-ball device or when the game ball does not enter a predetermined area in the V-ball device, control is performed so that the probability state thereafter does not change to a certain state. To do.

  In addition, it is possible to give such a certainty change by entering a ball only as an effect. That is, when a big hit is determined to be a big hit with a certain change, the V-ball entry device is set to a state where game balls can be accepted at a predetermined timing. If a sorting mechanism is provided in the V-ball entry device and the player hits a jackpot with a certain change in advance, the game ball that has entered the V-ball device is guided to a certain-change area, and the player can make a certain change. The effect of having acquired is performed. If the player hits a jackpot without a probability change in advance, the game ball may be led to a non-probability (normal) area, and an effect to the effect that the player has acquired the probability change may be performed.

  Subsequently, examples of the above-mentioned effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effect contents during the special game. More specifically, contents in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the fight between the characters can be exemplified. Such an effect after the special game can be referred to as an ending effect.

  Further, examples of the effect after the special game include a display in which the number of consecutive big hits is additionally displayed and a display in which the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time is displayed. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hits when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits continue. Further, with respect to the success of the big hits, when the number of occurrences of the big hits reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern which is not selected before that.

Furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit is not performed, and during the game after the occurrence of the small hit, it is the same as in the normal case, and it cannot be distinguished whether or not the probability is changing. It is conceivable to produce the contents.
<Various commands sent from main board to sub main board>

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. In the following, description will be given separately for commands related to the ordinary electric auditorium and other main commands. Here, however, the main commands other than the commands relating to the ordinary electric auditorium will be described first. First, the command transmission timings are as follows: during initial screen display, during a customer waiting demonstration (standby demonstration), when a special symbol design starts to change, when a special symbol design is confirmed, when a special symbol design is confirmed, during a big hit demonstration, At the time of opening the big hit big win winning opening, at the time of big hit middle big winning opening closing, at the time of the hit end demonstration, at the time of the big hit end demonstration end. The display of the initial screen is a period from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the start of the customer waiting demonstration and the transition to the steady state. In addition, at the time of a winning start, at the time of recovery from power interruption, and at the time of detecting an error, a command is transmitted in any case. Further, command transmission is also performed at the time of RWM clear.

  Among these, the commands for clearing the RWM include the effect display initialization, the effect LED initialization, and various error commands. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined out-of-place symbol (initial symbol when RWM is cleared) on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command turns on a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying effects and the like in accordance with the state of the error.

  As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. The customer waiting demonstration command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demonstration and for erasing the sound.

  The command at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol includes the number of stored symbols 1, the number of stored symbols 2, the communication test 1, the communication test 2, the number of productions A to Z, the production selection status 0 to 2, the variation additional information, and the design 1 production There are commands for a pattern, a design 2 effect pattern, a design 1 character effect, and a design 2 character effect. The symbol 1 stored number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 stored number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of effects related to the effect according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the various commands in the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. Things. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adjusting the fluctuation time. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Things. The design 1 character production command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the design of the first special design, and the design 2 character production command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the design of the second special design. is there.

  Commands for determining the symbol of the special symbol include commands for stopping a symbol 1 effect pattern and a symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbol 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  The commands during the special symbol pattern determination are as follows: fluctuation time reduction frequency 0 (low probability), fluctuation time reduction frequency AZ (low probability), fluctuation time reduction frequency 0 (high probability), probability fluctuation ( Command up to a predetermined number of changes). These are for transmitting a command relating to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving number display, and the like.

  Commands at the time of the jackpot start demonstration include a symbol 1 jackpot start demonstration, a symbol 2 jackpot start demonstration, and a command for designating a launch position. The symbol 1 big hit start demo command and the symbol 2 big hit start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the big hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The launching position designation command is used to notify the launching position when the player performs a so-called left-handed or right-handed hitting of a game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92. belongs to.

  The launch position designation command causes the player to separate game balls between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left-handing or right-handing as in the case of the big hit start demonstration. It is for notifying the launch position in the case.

  The commands for opening the big hit middle and big winning prize opening gates include a command for a symbol 1 big hit middle demo 1 to 16 and a symbol 2 big hit middle demo 1 to 16 commands. These are for displaying an effect based on the big hit symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of closing the big hit winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing effect command. This is for displaying a special winning opening closing effect.

  The command at the time of the hit end demonstration includes a command of a symbol 1 end demonstration and a symbol 2 end demonstration. These are for displaying a hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  A command at the end of the big hit demonstration is a launch position designation command. This is necessary when the firing positions need to be separated due to the positional relationship between the first starting winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91, and the second large winning opening 92. , To notify the launch position.

  Commands at the time of the start prize include a command of a hit notice (hit notice effect), a symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), a change notice (pattern notice effect), a number of symbols stored in one symbol, and a number of stored symbols in two symbols. Each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice is a command (prefetch command) related to the above-described prefetch effect by the advance information notifying unit 157. The hit notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the random number, and includes information on the success or failure according to the lottery probability. The symbol announcement command is for transmitting a random number value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of winning. Further, the change notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the change pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the change pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command of the number of memorized symbols 1 and the number of memorized symbols 2 is for notifying the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in the present embodiment, information such as the presence or absence of a pre-reading effect and the period as a result of the success / failure lottery is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by the respective commands of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice (the above-mentioned advance notice information). It has become. The details of these commands for the hit notice (hit notice effect), the symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), and the change notice (pattern notice effect) will be described later.

  Commands at the time of power interruption recovery include communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game state A to E for power interruption recovery, number of productions A to Z, production selection state 0 to 2, design 1 character production, design 2 character production, There are commands for the state after the power failure recovery, the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, the designation of the firing position, errors a to d, the number of symbols 1 stored, and the number of symbols 2 stored.

  The commands of the communication test 1 and the communication test 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands in the power-off recovery game states A to E are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of effects related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect and symbol 2 character effect commands are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not the power is hit. As the command in the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery and the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, a command according to the state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, hitting, etc. is transmitted. It is for. The launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation, as described above. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence or absence and the type of the error. The command of the number of memorized symbols 1 and the number of memorized symbols 2 is for notifying the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms “special electric accessory”, “conditioning device”, and “casual accessory operating device” used below will be described. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Among them, the “special electric accessory” activates the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92. It becomes. The “condition device” is activated when a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 91 or the second special winning opening 92 is detected. An object can be operated multiple times in succession.

The main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are a control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, a game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13, and a power-off process shown in FIG. Is executed on the main board 102.
<Control start processing>

The control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is a control process that is started after a security check using the production code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10. This control start process will be described later. After performing the necessary settings (S1 to S4) when the power is turned on, the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5) and the power-off information flag (power-off confirmation information) in the power-off status confirmation processing (S6 to S8) In response to the value and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, processing at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17), processing at the time of RWM initialization (S24 to S26), time setting for game progress interruption (S27), circulation processing (S32 (S28-S31)), and the like.
<< Settings required at power-on >>

  As settings required at the time of power-on, setting of a stack pointer (S1), setting of an interrupt mode (S2), and setting of permission to access the RWM 503 (S3) are performed, and then initial setting of an internal register is performed ( S4).

In the processing of setting the stack pointer (S1), the stack pointer is set as an initial value of the stack pointer to secure a stack area, and the stack pointer is set at a specific address. Next, in the interrupt mode setting (S2), a mode of a predetermined number is set, and in the RWM access permission setting (S3), access permission data is set in a predetermined register to permit access to the RWM. I do. As a result, the maskable interrupt is set to a specific interrupt mode, and the access to the CPU built-in RWM is permitted. Further, in the setting of the built-in register (S4), various corresponding set values such as a game progress interrupt use set value and a clock source selection value are set using the built-in register initial setting table. The interrupt on the main board 102 will be described later.
<< Confirmation of operation state of RWM clear switch >>

  In the process of confirming the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the state of the output signal of the initialization switch 544 input via the input port is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been pressed (turned on). If the switch has not been pressed (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag in the power-off state determination process (S6 to S8) described later The process proceeds to the determination process (S6). On the other hand, if the initialization switch 544 is pressed (S5: YES), the processing of the RWM initialization (S24 to S26) is performed.

  Here, the initialization switch 544 is determined to have been operated when the RWM clear switch bit of the corresponding input port is determined to be turned on five times consecutively in order to avoid initialization due to noise at power-on. The determination of whether or not the initialization switch 544 has been pressed is performed only once at this time, and no determination is made thereafter.

In the process of confirming the state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the RWM start address (address) is set as a reference value of the relative address, the number of input confirmations (here, 5) is set, and the corresponding input port is set. Control processing such as input of a value, inspection of an RWM clear switch bit in the value of the input port, confirmation of the inspection result, and input confirmation repeated for the set number of times of input confirmation are executed.
<< Power-off status confirmation process >>

  In the power-off state confirmation process (S6 to S8) when the initialization switch 544 is not operated, the value of the power-off information flag is read and whether the read value matches predetermined power-off normal data. It is determined whether or not it is (S6). The power-off normal data is stored when the power-off process is performed normally when the power-off (power-off) in which the power is turned off occurs. If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data and the determination result in S6 is NO, the control processing will be described later, as in the case where the initialization switch 544 is operated. The processing shifts to processing at the time of RWM initialization (S24 and thereafter).

  If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (S6: YES), checksum data is calculated (S7). In the process of calculating the checksum data, although not shown, an initial value is set as the checksum data, a predetermined operation is performed on the checksum data, and the calculated checksum data is set to 0. A determination is made as to whether it is different from.

If the checksum data is not 0 (S8: NO), that is, if the restart preparation processing execution condition is not satisfied, the RWM head upper part is set as the upper part of the reference value of the relative address. The process proceeds to the process at the time of initialization (S24 and thereafter). On the other hand, if the checksum data is 0 (S8: YES), the processing shifts to the power-off recovery processing (S9 to S17) described later.
<< Process at power-off recovery >>

  In the process at the time of power-off recovery, the value of the stack pointer buffer is set in the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is returned to the value stored at the time of power-off (S9). Further, in order to inspect the communication line between the main board 102 and the sub board 104, a request for transmitting an effect control command to the sub board 104 is made (S10, S11), and a decorative lamp (game effect lamp) and a sound effect (sound sound) are issued. In order to return the effect of (effect) to the state before the power failure occurred, a request to transmit an effect control command to the sub-board 104 is made (S10, S11). Further, in order to request a command corresponding to the number of active balls of the special symbol display device, a symbol storage number command request process is executed (S12).

  Further, the solenoid is returned to the output state before the power failure occurred (S13). Specifically, in order to restore the open / closed state of the second starting winning opening 63, the first winning opening 91, and the second winning opening 92 to the state before the power was turned off, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76, the big winning The solenoid actuation bits for the mouth solenoids 80, 81 are checked in sequence. When the solenoid operation bit of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid control is on, it is determined that the second start winning port 63 is open before the power is turned off, and the second start winning port 63 is opened. Stored in the accessory solenoid control. Subsequently, when the solenoid operation bit of the first big winning solenoid control is ON, it is determined that the first big winning opening 91 is open before the power is turned off, and the solenoid operation setting value is set to open the first big winning opening 91. Is stored in the normally-operated accessory solenoid control. When the solenoid operation bit of the second big winning solenoid control is ON, it is determined that the second big winning opening 92 is open before the power is turned off, and the first big winning opening 91 is opened. Normally stored in the electric accessory solenoid control.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the subsequent special symbol setting process (S14), and information on the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71) is set. In this processing, the value of the special symbol mode flag is loaded (in other words, the value of the special symbol mode flag is incorporated) and stored in a predetermined register. Next, a power return setting (S15) and a data storage process (S16) are executed. Further, a detection setting of a communication line abnormality with the payout control board (S17) is executed. Is set, and the communication line abnormality bit of the content of the error 1 flag is set.

  Subsequently, in the process of starting the game progress interrupt process, the address of the PTC0 counter setting register is set to start the game progress interrupt, and the count value of a predetermined size (corresponding to about 4 ms here) is set in the PTC0 counter setting. It is set in a register (S18). As a result, a game progress interruption occurs every 4 ms.

  Then, a process of restoring various registers other than the flag register is executed (S19), and a process of determining whether or not the state at the time of the power interruption is the interrupt permission (S20) is executed. If the interruption of the power supply is prohibited (S20: NO), the flag register is restored (S21), and the control processing is stopped based on the restart index information set in the stack pointer. Return to the processing of the address to be returned before occurrence. On the other hand, if the interrupt is permitted when the power is turned off (S20: YES), after the flag register is restored (S22), interrupt permission is set (S23), and then the stack pointer is set. Based on the restart index information, the control process is returned to the process to be returned before the power failure occurs.

Here, the reason why the flag register is restored separately from the other registers is that the flag register stores game state information such as a certain change, and the control processing is powered off as much as possible to restore such information. This is done just before returning to the state before the occurrence.
<< Process at the time of RWM initialization >>

  In the process of initializing the RWM (S24 to S28), after clearing the RWM area (S24), initializing the RWM (S25), initializing the effect display (effect display device 60) (S26), and Time setting for interrupting the game progress (S27) is performed. In the processing from the clearing of the RWM area (S24) to the initial setting of the RWM (S25), clear data (00H) is set in the entire RWM area, and the clear data is stored as a reference value of the relative address. Is incremented by one. Further, bit 7 of this reference value is inspected, and the judgment of the inspection result is executed. In the inspection result determination process, if the inspection result is 0, the process returns to the process of storing the above-described clear data to the reference value, and the address of the initialization data setting table is set. Thereby, the initial value of RWM is set. The clearing of the RWM area is not limited to clearing the entire area. For example, it is possible to clear only a partial area in which specific information is stored or only an area excluding an unused area. Is also good.

  Note that “H” described at the end of a numerical value, such as “00H” which is the value of the above-mentioned clear data, indicates that the numerical value is represented in hexadecimal. Further, in this embodiment, a numerical value representing a hexadecimal number is denoted by a symbol “H”, a numerical value representing a binary number is denoted by a symbol “B”, and a symbol indicating such a notation is appended. Numerical values that are not described are assumed to be represented by decimal numbers.

In the initialization of the effect display device (S26), command request data setting is performed using the address of the effect initial command setting table as an argument in order to initialize the effect display device 60 and make a command transmission request for monitoring the error state and illegal winning ball monitoring information. Execute the process.
<< Processing of time setting for interrupting game progress >>

In the game progress interruption time setting process (S27), a count value of a predetermined size is set in a corresponding counter setting register to activate the game progress interruption, and a game progress interruption is generated, for example, every 4 ms. .
<< Circulation processing >>

  After the time setting for interrupting the game progress (S27), preparation for recursion (restart) of a predetermined timer, which is an interrupt processing time monitoring means, and updating of random number-related values used for generating initial values of various random numbers are performed. A circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)) is executed. In this circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)), interrupts are first prohibited (S28) to manage the gaming machines. Further, in order to prepare the interrupt processing time monitoring means to recur, a predetermined value serving as the first recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). The first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H.

  Then, an initial value random number updating process is executed (S30), and the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Thereafter, after permitting the interrupt (S31), the process returns to the process of prohibiting the interrupt (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S31) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interruption permission (S28) is executed, the above-mentioned game progress interruption becomes possible, and the game progress interruption process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 4ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. .
<< Initial random number update processing >>

  In the above-mentioned initial value random number update processing (S30), the random number is updated from the initial value random number update table in order to update the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Acquire the number of times and update the initial random number by the number of updates. In acquiring the number of random number updates, the content (number of random numbers) indicated by the data address (0D10H) in the first row of the left column of the initial value random number update table (see FIG. 15A) is used as the random number update number. . In this case, the number of random numbers is usually three: an initial value random number per symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol. When updating the initial value random number per symbol in the initial value random number updating process (S30), the data stored in the data address (0D13H) of the address (lower order) of the initial value random number per symbol in the initial value random number update table. The information (= initial value random number per symbol) stored in the RWM address combining the byte data and the predetermined address (upper) is used as an argument, and does not exceed the maximum value (data 0D11H) of the initial value random value per symbol. A 2-byte soft random number update process (described later) is executed in the range. Then, the initial value random number per special symbol and the soft initial value random per special symbol are similarly updated by the 2-byte soft random number updating process, and the initial value random number updating process is performed for a total of three initial value random numbers (S30). Is generated.

In addition, in the initial value random number updating process (S30), when there is an abnormality in the random number related value, the random number related value is corrected. In the process of correcting the random number relation value, a random number relation value is generated based on the random number value obtained in the 2-byte soft random number update processing, and a predetermined value is subtracted from the random number relation value. If the result of the subtraction is 0, it is determined that the random number relation value is normal and the random number relation value is stored. +1 is set as a correction value, the correction value is added to the random number-related value, and the obtained random number-related value is stored. Thereby, the abnormality of the random number relation value is detected, and the abnormal random number relation value is corrected. That is, the correction of the random number-related value is performed by performing a predetermined operation on the random number-related value, and correcting the random number-related value when the calculation result does not reach the predetermined value.
<< 2 byte software random number update processing >>

In the two-byte soft random number update process, the maximum value of the random number and the storage address of the random number are obtained from the reference value of the input relative address, and the random number is updated. In obtaining the maximum value of the random number, the content indicated by the reference value +0 is set as the lower random number maximum value, and the content indicated by the reference value +1 is set as the upper random value maximum value. In obtaining the storage address of the random number, the content indicated by the reference value +3 is set as the lower order of the random number storage address, and a predetermined head upper address for referring to the RWM work data storage area storing each initial value random number data is set as the random number storage address. Make it higher. In updating the random number, the random number is incremented by 1, and if it exceeds the maximum random number, it is set to 0. In order to update the random number, the 2-byte random number stored at the acquired random number storage address (upper address + lower address) is acquired. +1 is added to the random number. If the sum exceeds the maximum value of the obtained random numbers, 0 is set. The updated random number is stored in the obtained random number storage address, and then set in the output random number data. Further, the reference value +3 is set to the reference value to be output.
<Game progress interruption processing>

  Next, a description will be given of a game progress interruption process that is repeated at a period of 4 ms based on the cycle information set in the process of setting the time for game progress interruption (S27). As shown in FIG. 13, in the game progress interruption processing, setting of interruption operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of interruption processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), permission of interruption (S45). S71) is performed in order, and the process returns to the process before the occurrence of the game progress interruption.

  Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition set value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in a control register corresponding to a predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). The second recursive information, together with the first recursive information set earlier, serves as a condition for recursively restarting the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means, as described later.

  In the management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the gaming machine. First, an input process (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. Monitored here are various switches mounted on the game board, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, and disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number updating processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value updating type random number updating process (S47) is executed to update the random number per symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number updating process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. In order to update the 2-byte timer, a timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set an effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, an effective period setting process (S50) of the second starting opening is executed. .

  Further, a winning monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of payouts of the prize balls, create an output request for the board external information, and send a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

  Next, when the game ball passes the normal symbol operation gate (operation ports 68a, 68b), a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53) is executed to store a random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or In order to perform the process related to the ordinary symbol electric accessory, the ordinary symbol control process (S54) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the start of the change of the normal symbol, a normal symbol change start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, a starting opening monitor control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display section 70 or the second special symbol is displayed. In order to perform the process related to the display unit 71, a special symbol control process (S57) is executed. Subsequently, in order to perform a process related to the special electric auditors, a special electric auditors control process (S58) is executed, and in order to perform a process related to the validity period of the first big winning opening 91 or the second big winning opening 92, A special winning opening validity period setting process (S59) is executed, and a special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to monitor the change start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, abnormality detection processing (S61) is performed to monitor magnetism, monitor disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitor radio waves, monitor the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board frame, and monitor the paired glass. Then, in order to detect an incoming ball passage time abnormality, an incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to make a display request for the number of times the special electric auditorium is continuously operated, the error state, the number of operation-reserved balls of the ordinary symbol display device, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63). ) To monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20 to execute a handle state signal inspection process (S64). In addition, the display of special symbols, the display of ordinary symbols, the display of the number of active balls on the special symbol display device (70, 71), the display of the number of active balls on the ordinary symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that the device operates continuously and to display an error.

  Subsequently, a firing control signal output process (S66) is executed to output a signal of prohibition / permission of launching of the game ball, and a test signal output process (S67) to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus. Execute Further, in order to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid, the first winning opening opening solenoid, and the second winning opening opening solenoid, a solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and an effect control command is transmitted. The external information output process (S70) is executed to execute the effect control command transmission process (S69) and to output signals to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interruption permission (S71) is executed, and the control processing returns to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interruption is executed, the above-described circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)) of the control start processing is executed.
<< input processing >>

  The input process (S45) is a control module related to switch input. In the input process (S45), each switch attached to the game board, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, an open signal, a radio wave detection signal, In order to monitor the input of various signals of the touch state signal, the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data are obtained from the input information table, and the switch input is performed for the number of inspections.

  In obtaining the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data, the content indicated by the address of the input information table (input information table + 0) is used as the number of inspections, and the input information table + 1 to the input port address, Level mask data, level addresses, and rising mask data are obtained for the number of inspections.

  In the switch input, after the acquired input port level data is created, if the acquired rising mask data is other than 0, rising data is created. In creating the level data, the state of the bit indicated by the acquired level mask data is read from the acquired input port at predetermined intervals (for example, 5 μs) or more and continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), and 5 times. Are stored in the acquired level address as the current level data. The upper address (level upper address) of the level data is the RWM head upper address (0F0H). In addition, as the bit that did not match even once in five readings, the previous level data is stored.

In the generation of the rising data, the exclusive OR of the current and previous level data is calculated to generate the rising data of the bit indicated by the acquired rising mask data, and the result of the exclusive OR and the current level data are calculated. Performs a logical conjunction. Further, a logical product of the generated rising data and the obtained rising mask data is calculated, and the result of the logical product is stored in an area of an address obtained by adding +1 to the obtained level address.
<< Various random number update processing >>

In the various random number updating process (S46), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. In updating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is incremented by one, and is set to 0 when exceeding the maximum value (here, 232). The RWM updating process is executed using the value +1 (223 in this case) as an argument. In updating the variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (here, 3511) is subtracted from the value of the variation pattern random number in order to update the variation pattern random number. If the result of the subtraction is less than 0, the maximum value of the variation pattern random number + 1 (here, 50000) is added to the result of the subtraction. The result of the calculation is stored in the fluctuation pattern random number.
<< Initial value update type random number update processing >>

  In the initial value update type random number update process (S47), an initial value update type random number update table (see FIG. 15B) for updating the random number per symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. , Obtains the number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum value of the random numbers, the address of the initial value updating random number, and the address of the initial value work, and updates the initial value updating random number.

  In obtaining the number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum value of the random numbers, the address of the initial value updating type random number, and the address of the initial value work, the data address (0D30H) in the first column of the left column of the initial value updating type random number updating table is used. ) Is the number of random numbers to be updated, and the maximum value of the random number, the address of the initial value updating random number, And the address of the initial value work are sequentially and repeatedly acquired.

In updating the initial value update type random number, an initial value random number to be updated is obtained from the obtained initial value update type random number address (lower order) and an address obtained from an address (higher order) of a predetermined RWM work area. Updates the random number by +1. If the maximum value is exceeded, the value is set to 0, so that a 2-byte soft random number update process is executed using an address in which the maximum value of the initial value update type random number in the initial value update type random number update table is described as an argument. As a result of the execution, if the updated value of the initial value update type random number matches the content of the obtained initial value work, the initial value of the initial value update type random number is updated. (0D37H), and the contents of the initial value random number indicated by the address (0D38H) three rows below are set as new initial values, and stored in the address of the obtained initial value update type random number and the address of the obtained initial value work.
<< Initial random number update processing >>

Regarding the initial value random number updating process, the same program module as the initial value random number updating process executed in the control start process is used, but the cycle of updating the random number related value is equal to the cycle of the game progress interruption (4 ms here). This is different from the case where it is executed during the control start processing.
<< Timer subtraction processing >>

In the timer subtraction process (S49), to update the 2-byte timer, the content of the address of the 2-byte timer update table (address of the 2-byte timer update table + 0) is used as the number of timers, and the next address (2-byte timer update) is performed. The acquisition of the lower address of the 2-byte timer and the updating of the data (various timer values) stored at the address indicated by the predetermined upper address and the acquired lower address are repeated for the number of timers from the address +1) of the table. Each time the timer value 2 is updated by 1, the number of random numbers is decremented (-1), and the result of the decrement is checked. In other cases, the remaining 2-byte timer is continuously updated. As a result of the check, if the value of the random number is 0, the 2-byte timer is not updated. Note that the upper address of the 2-byte timer is the RWM work area start address (0F0H).
<<< Startup port 2 validity period setting process >>>

In the validity period setting process of the start-up opening 2 (S50), the value corresponding to the value of the normal symbol status (described later) and the value of the start-up opening 2 valid extension timer are set in order to set the validity period of the second start winning opening 63. Is stored in (the storage area of) the startup port 2 valid period flag. The relationship between the value of the normal symbol status and the value stored in the startup port 2 valid period flag corresponding to the value of the startup port 2 valid extension timer is 3, which indicates that the value of the normal symbol status is normally operating the electric accessory. In this case, no value is set for the startup port 2 valid extension timer, and predetermined startup port 2 valid period data (1) is used as the value stored in the startup port 2 valid period flag. On the other hand, when the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than the normal electric accessory operation, if the value of the starting port 2 effective extension timer is not 0, a predetermined starting port is stored as the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag. 2 valid period data (1) is used. Also, when the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than that during normal operation of the electric accessory, and if the value of the starting port 2 valid extension timer is 0, a predetermined starting port is stored as a value stored in the starting port 2 valid period flag. 2 Invalid period data (0) is used.
<< Winning monitoring process >>

In the winning monitoring process (S51), the number of paying out prize balls is stored, the security output request to be output to the external terminal (the various external output terminals of the above-described external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)) is created, and In order to make a request for transmission of a command to be transmitted to the effect control board (here, the sub main board 301), the content indicated by the start address of the winning monitoring table (winning monitoring table + 0) is set as the number of inspections, and the number of inspections is displayed on the game board. For each of the various winning devices (start-up opening, large winning opening, etc.), a switch passing inspection of the game ball is performed. As a result of the switch passage inspection, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the switch, the storage of the number of award balls (the number of game media to be paid out), the creation of a security output request to be output to an external terminal, and the command transmission request Do. Here, the configuration of the prize monitoring table includes the number of inspections and inspection data of various game ball detection devices (game ball switches). The configuration of the inspection data includes switch bit data, prize ball determination data, and invalid period existence determination. It consists of data, EVENT data for generating a command to be transmitted to the effect control board, and MODE data.
<< Prizeball control processing >>

In the prize ball control process (S52), in order to control the payout control board 103, monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 103, a command transmission request to the payout control board 103, and command transmission and payout to the payout control board 103 are performed. Inspection of received data from the control board 103 is performed in order. In monitoring data reception from the payout control board 103, a data reception monitoring process is executed. In response to a command transmission request to the payout control board 103, a payout command request process is executed. In the command transmission to the payout control board 103 and the inspection of the received data from the payout control board 103, a payout command control process is executed.
<< Normal symbol operation gate monitoring process >>

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53), the game ball is monitored for passing through the normal symbol operation gates (here, the operation ports 68a and 68b). Updates the number of design-operation-reserved balls (normal number of symbols reserved). As a result of the update, when the passing of the game ball is confirmed when the value of the number of ordinary design operation reserved balls is less than the maximum number of 4, the random number related to the ordinary symbol is stored.
<< Normal symbol control processing >>

In the ordinary symbol control process (S54), the status of the ordinary symbol is monitored in order to perform the ordinary symbol display on the main control display device 53 and the process related to the ordinary electric accessory, and when it is determined that the ordinary symbol control is being performed, A process (sub-module program) related to a normal symbol display or a normal electric accessory determined for each status is executed. In monitoring the state of the ordinary symbol, when the ordinary symbol status is other than 0, it is determined that the ordinary symbol is being controlled. During the normal symbol control process, the value of the normal symbol status takes 1 to 4, and the control module corresponding to each of the normal symbol statuses 1 to 4 is executed. Then, the normal symbol status 1 is during the normal symbol change, the normal symbol status 2 is during the display of the normal symbol stop symbol, the normal symbol status 3 is during the normal electric accessory operation, and the normal symbol status 4 is during the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration. Yes, it is. Of the sub-module processes allocated during the control in this process, for example, in the process of normal symbol variation, the timer value for controlling the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol is updated.
<< Normal symbol change start monitoring process >>

  In the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S55), the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the change of the normal symbol is to be started, the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is updated, a hit determination, a stop symbol is determined, Ordinary symbol fluctuation setting is performed. In the monitoring of the operation state of the ordinary symbol, when the value of the ordinary symbol status is 0, which indicates that the ordinary symbol change is waiting, and when the value of the number of ordinary symbol operation pending balls is other than 0, the variation of the ordinary symbol is started. Judge to make it. In updating the number of ordinary symbol operation reserved balls, the content of the ordinary symbol activated reserved ball number is decremented by one. In the hit determination and the determination of the stop symbol, a normal symbol hit determination process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation setting, after the setting of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern number and the setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the state of the normal symbol, the hit judgment, and the RWM used for the determination of the fluctuation pattern are cleared.

In setting a normal symbol variation pattern number, a probability variation function inspection process is executed, and a byte data acquisition process is executed using the acquired ordinary probability variation operation data and the address of the ordinary symbol variation control table as arguments. As a result of the execution, a 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed using the address calculated by adding the acquired base address and the acquired 1-byte data and the value of the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area as arguments. As a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is set as a normal symbol variation pattern number. In setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, a 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed using the value obtained (by 2) with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation time table address and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern number as arguments. As a result of the execution, the acquired 2-byte data is stored in the ordinary symbol timer. In clearing the RWM used for setting the state of the ordinary symbol, determining the hit, and determining the variation pattern, the data storage processing is performed using the address of the ordinary symbol variation state setting table as an argument in order to change the ordinary symbol state to the ordinary symbol variation. Execute. The normal symbol hit determination area used for hit determination and the normal symbol change pattern determination area used for determining the change pattern are cleared to zero.
<< Starting port monitoring control processing >>

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S56), the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 62) and the starting opening 2 (second starting winning opening 63) of the game ball are monitored. For both the start-up port 1 and the start-up port 2, the start-up port monitoring process is executed using the corresponding monitoring table (start-up port 1 monitor table or start-up port 2 monitor table shown in FIG. 27). For the (starting port relating to the ordinary electric accessory in this embodiment), the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag is checked, and as a result of the inspection, the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag is set to a predetermined starting port 2 valid period data. If so, a start-up port monitoring process is executed. The details of the starting port monitoring control processing (S56) and the starting port monitoring processing will be described later.
<<< Special symbol control processing >>>

In the special symbol control process (S57), a state of waiting for a hit is inspected, and if it is determined that the state of waiting for a hit is detected, the special symbol display device 1 (first special symbol display section 70) or the special symbol display device 2 (first 2) The processing related to the special symbol display section 71) is executed. In the inspection of the hit waiting state, if the value of the special electric game status (described later) is 0, it is determined that the state of waiting for the hit, that is, the special game is not being executed. In the process relating to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2, the value of the special symbol 2 game status is inspected in order to perform any of the processes relating to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2. As a result of the inspection, if it is 0, it is determined that the processing relating to the special symbol display device 1 is to be performed, and if it is other than 0, it is determined that the processing relating to the special symbol display device 2 is to be performed. In each of the processing relating to the special symbol display device 1 and the processing relating to the special symbol display device 2, the address of the corresponding special figure game status (special figure 1 game status or special figure 2 game status) and the special figure control table The special symbol control general-purpose process is executed using the address of the (special figure 1 control table or the special figure 2 control table) as an argument. The special symbol control general-purpose process is a process of allocating the sub-modules to each status according to the status similarly to the above-described normal symbol control process, but differs in that the special symbol is controlled and that both the special symbols 1 and 2 are handled. . By the special symbol control general-purpose process and its sub-module process, control related to lighting of the special symbol display device from the change of the special symbol to the stop is performed.
<<< Special electric accessory control process >>>

In the special electric auditors control process (S58), in order to perform a process related to the special game, the operating condition of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric auditors is operating. If so, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. In the inspection of the operating states of the condition device and the special electric accessory, when the value of the special electric game status is other than 0, it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. While the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating, the value of the special electric game status takes 1 to 8, and the corresponding control module is executed in each special electric game status 1 to 8. And the special electric game status 1 is preparing to open the special winning opening, the special electric game status 2 is operating the special electric auditorium, the special electric game status 3 is closing the special winning opening, the special electric game status 4 is during the big hit end demonstration, the special electric game status 5 corresponds to a small hit start demonstration, special power game status 6 corresponds to a small hit special power operation, special power game status 7 corresponds to a small hit large winning opening closing, and special power game status 8 corresponds to a small hit end demonstration.
<<< Grand Prize opening period setting process >>>

In the special winning opening validity period setting process (S59), a value corresponding to the value of the special winning opening validity period buffer is stored in the special winning opening validity period flag. For example, when the value of the special winning opening valid period buffer is 0, the special winning opening invalid period data is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag, and when the value of the special winning opening valid period buffer is other than 0, the special winning opening validity buffer is stored. The period data is stored in the special winning opening valid period flag. In the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 91 and the second special winning opening 92 are provided as the special winning opening, but the same control processing can be applied to any of them.
<< Special symbol change start monitoring control processing >>

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60), the change start of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) is monitored. In both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the address of the special figure game status (special figure 1 game status or special figure 2 game status) and the special figure change start monitoring table (special figure 1 change start monitoring shown in FIG. 27) The special symbol change start monitoring process is executed using the address of the table or the special figure 2 change start monitoring table) as an argument. The details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) will be described later.
<< Abnormality detection processing >>

  In the abnormality detection process (S61), monitoring of magnetism, monitoring of disconnection / short circuit / power supply, monitoring of radio waves, monitoring of the open / closed state of the glass frame set / game board frame / back set (here, the set base 31), and the like are performed. For this purpose, an error determination value is created based on inputs from various sensors. Thereafter, an inspection of the error state, a storage of the error state, and a request for displaying an error state effect of the gaming machine on the effect control board (here, the sub main board 301) are sequentially performed. If it is determined in the error state inspection that there is no change in the error state, the storage of the error state and the request to display the error state effect of the gaming machine on the effect control board are not performed.

In creating the error determination value, in order to create the error determination value, a magnetic detection signal inspection, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal inspection, a radio wave detection signal inspection, and an open signal inspection are sequentially performed. However, the inspection data used for these inspections is a value obtained by exclusive-ORing the value of the received signal level and the value of the error flag with the communication abnormality mask data. In the error state inspection, the error flag comparison value and the error flag value are compared in order to perform the error state inspection, and if they match, it is determined that there is no change in the error state. Note that the comparison value of the error flag is a value in which bit 0 of the communication line abnormality determination value is reflected on bit 0 of the error determination value created in creating the error determination value. In storing the error state, the error flag comparison value created in the error state inspection is stored in the error flag. In a request to display the error state effect of the gaming machine on the effect control board, a command request setting process is executed using the MODE (error A) data and the error flag comparison value created in the error state inspection as arguments.
<< ball entry time abnormality detection processing >>

  In the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62), in order to detect the incoming ball passage time abnormality, the continuous ON time of each switch (each prize detecting device) level is monitored, and as a result of the monitoring, the change from the previous time is detected. If it is determined that there is, an incoming ball passage time abnormality setting, a command transmission request, and a security output request to be output to an external terminal are created in order. However, when monitoring the continuous ON time at each switch level, if it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, a security output request to be output to the external terminal is not created.

In monitoring the continuous on-time of each switch level, the content indicated by the address of the continuous switch table is used as the number of inspections in order to monitor the continuous on-time of each switch level. The switch bit data of the sensor provided in the mouth is sequentially acquired. The timer address corresponding to each of the obtained switch bit data is obtained, the switch level ON time is measured, and when it is determined that the continuous ON time is abnormal, each of the effect control boards is identified so that it is possible to identify which switch has an abnormality. The EVENT data stored at the address corresponding to the switch bit data is obtained. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, EVENT (error B0) data (00H) is set. If the acquired EVENT data is different from the value of the incoming ball passage time abnormality flag (described later), it is determined that there has been a change from the previous time. In the setting of the incoming ball passing time abnormality, the EVENT data is stored in the incoming ball passing time abnormality flag. In a command transmission request, a command request setting process is executed using MODE (error B) data (9EH) and EVENT data as arguments. In creating a security output request to be output to an external terminal, a signal output request process is executed using the address of the abnormality sensor detection timer + 1 as an argument.
<< Gaming state display processing >>

In the game state display processing (S63), the display request of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of operation-reserved balls of the ordinary symbol display device, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the special symbol display device are issued. To do so, create display data for the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, create display data for an error state, create display data for the number of active balls on a normal symbol display device, and hold the operational balls for a special symbol display device. Create display data for numbers. The “creation of display data” here is, more specifically, a process of storing a table offset value for creating display data in an LED output process (S65) described later in each RWM work area. Is represented. Then, in this game state display processing (S63), processing of switching the lighting pattern by checking the value of a predetermined timer is executed.
<< Handle state signal inspection processing >>

  In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S64), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20. If the inspection result indicates that the steering wheel state has changed, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented. , Update the handle state, set the handle state monitoring timer, and issue a command transmission request for a handle state effect. As a result of the inspection, when it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, a steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If it is determined that the steering wheel timer is being subtracted during the subtraction of the steering wheel status monitoring timer, the subsequent processing related to the steering wheel status is not performed.

  In the inspection of the steering wheel state, the value of the reception signal level and the value of the steering wheel state flag are inspected in order to inspect the steering wheel state. If the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 0 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that the handle state has not changed, and if the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that the handle state has changed. I do. If the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 1 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that the handle state has changed. If the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that the handle state has not changed. I do.

  In the subtraction of the steering wheel status monitoring timer, the content of the steering wheel status monitoring timer is decremented by one in order to subtract the steering wheel status monitoring timer. If the result of the subtraction is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted. In updating the handle state, a value corresponding to the value of the handle state flag is stored in the handle state flag in order to update the handle state. When the value of the handle state flag is 00H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 01H, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 00H.

In setting the steering wheel state monitoring timer, the steering wheel state monitoring timer stores the steering wheel state monitoring time in order to set the steering wheel state monitoring timer. In the command transmission request of the steering wheel state effect, in order to make a command transmission request of the steering wheel state effect, a result of ANDing MODE (handle state information) data and a predetermined value 7FH, and a lower address of the steering wheel state flag The command request setting process is executed with the argument as an argument.
<< LED output processing >>

  In the LED output process (S65), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of active balls on the special symbol display device, the display of the number of active balls of the normal symbol display device, the display of the game state, the special electric operation To display the number of times the accessory is operated continuously, to display the operation status of the special electric cabinet when the accessory continuous actuation device is not operating, to display separately (right-handed or left-handed), and to display errors , Display initialization and display data output are sequentially performed.

To summarize the contents of the LED output processing (S65), in the above-described display initialization, clear data is output to the segment output port in order to initialize the display. In outputting the above-described display data, in order to output the display data, after outputting a digit corresponding to the data to be displayed, the data of the LED segment to be displayed is output.
<< Launch control signal output processing >>

  In the firing control signal output process (S66), a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball is output, so that the communication status with the payout control board 103 and the setting of prohibition / permission of firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality and After obtaining the output data of the prohibition / permission of the launch, the prohibition / permission signal of the launch is output. In the setting of the prohibition / permission of firing and the acquisition of output data of prohibition / permission of firing corresponding to the communication state with the dispensing control board 103 and the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, a flag reflecting the bit setting request is created, and the output data To get.

When creating a flag that reflects a bit setting request, if the communication error bit of the error flag or the disconnection short-circuit power supply error bit of the error flag is on, the bit clear request is reflected and the flag is reflected. It is reflected in the presence flag. In obtaining the output data, a bit data setting process is executed by using a flag reflecting the bit setting request, the address of a buffer such as a digit, and the emission permission signal bit data as arguments. The bit data obtained as a result of the execution is set as output data. In outputting the prohibition / permission signal of firing, the obtained output data is output to an output port such as a digit in order to output the prohibition / permission signal of firing.
<< Test signal output processing >>

  In the test signal output process (S67), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port. Of the plurality of test signal output ports, the test signal output port 1 outputs a signal during a change of each special symbol, a jackpot, during the operation of the continuous accessory actuating device, and during the operation of the condition device from the associated terminals. The test signal output port 2 is connected to each of the terminals associated with the signals of the normal electric accessory opening extended state, the ordinary symbol fluctuation time reduction state, the ordinary symbol high probability state, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction state, and the special symbol high probability state. Output. The test signal output port 3 outputs a signal during normal electric auditors operation, a signal during normal symbol fluctuation, a signal per normal symbol, and a signal during special electric auditors operation from associated terminals. In order to create a signal to be output to each of the test signal output ports 1 to 3, output data creation processing is performed using the address of the corresponding test signal data table among the test signal data tables 1 to 3 as an argument.

The test signal output port 5 outputs signals of the gaming machine error state, the launch position designation, and the symbol data from the associated terminals. In creating a signal to be output to the test signal output port 5, the lower two bits of the symbol combination number are usually set to bits 0 and 1 of symbol data. In addition, an error inspection process is performed using the test terminal error output mask data as an argument. As a result of the execution, if an error is detected, it is determined that a gaming machine error has occurred, and the gaming machine error state signal is turned on. Otherwise, the game machine error state signal is turned off. When the value of the hitting state flag is 0, the firing position designation signals 1 to 3 are turned off. In other cases, ON of the firing position specifying signal 1 and OFF of the firing position specifying signal 2 and the firing position specifying signal 3 are created. The test signal output port 6 and the test signal output port 7 output a signal of the symbol data from each of the associated terminals.
<< solenoid output processing >>

In the solenoid output process (S68), to output the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the special winning opening opening solenoid, the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the special winning opening opening solenoid are acquired. , And output data. Acquisition of the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid, and the acquisition of the output data of the special winning opening solenoid, the acquisition of the solenoid operation flag and the solenoid operation timer, the acquisition of the output data, and the update of the solenoid operation timer, respectively. Do. In outputting the output data, the result of the logical sum of the acquired output data of the ordinary motor-operated accessory solenoid and the output data of the big winning opening opening solenoid is output to the solenoid output port.
<< Transaction control command transmission processing >>

  In the production control command transmission processing (S69), the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the production control board is inspected, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is cleared. Then, acquisition of MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output of MODE data, holding of MODE data, acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output of EVENT data are sequentially performed. The transmission timing of the command data is defined by the effect data strobe, and a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) after the ON time of the effect data strobe signal (here, 2 μs or more) is the effect data holding time.

  In the inspection of the command transmission request, the value of the command request writing position (area) is compared with the value of the command request reading position (area). If the values do not match, it is determined that there is a command transmission request. In obtaining the requested command data, a double value of the logical product of the address calculation value stored in the command request reading position and the position correction bit data is added to the address of the command buffer, and as a result of the addition, the content of the obtained address is obtained. Is command data. After the acquisition of the address calculation value stored in the command request reading position, the command request reading position is incremented by 1 to update the contents of the command data reading position. In clearing the command buffer, the command buffer storing the acquired command data is cleared to 0 in order to clear the command buffer.

In the acquisition of MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, the higher order of the acquired command data is set as MODE data. In outputting the MODE data, after outputting the obtained MODE data to the effect command output port, a strobe output process is executed to output an effect data strobe. In holding the MODE data, a wait is performed for a predetermined time (46 μs or more in this case) for holding the MODE data. In acquiring EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, the lower order of the acquired command data is set as EVENT data. In outputting the EVENT data, the obtained EVENT data is output to the same effect command output port as described above, and then a strobe output process is executed to output an effect data strobe.
<< External information output processing >>

  In the external information output process (S70), a signal to be output to the external output terminal of the external relay terminal board 46 is created, and the created signal is output. The configuration of the external information output port includes external information 1 to external information 6 and security, and the remaining one bit is unused. In creating the external information 1, the external information 3 to the external information 6, an output data creation process is executed using the address of the external information data table as an argument. When the value of the hit flag is the special figure 1 small hit data, and when the probability variation function inspection process is performed, and the execution result indicates that the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display device is not operated, the external information 3 bit is turned on. create.

In the creation of the external information 2, a predetermined bit of the start-up information timer is checked in order to create the external information 2. As a result of the check, the external information is set in accordance with ON / OFF of a predetermined bit of the start-up information timer. Create 2 on / off. In the creation of security, an error check process is executed using the external information error output mask data as an argument. As a result of the execution, if an error is detected, the security bit of the output data is turned on. Otherwise, the security bit of the output data is turned off. In outputting the created signal, the created external information 1 to external information 6 and security are output to an external information output port.
<Interrupt on main board>

  Next, an interruption in the main board 102 will be described. In the main board 102, a maskable interrupt and a non-maskable interrupt are performed, of which the maskable interrupt is caused by PT0I. The maskable interrupt by PT0I realizes an interrupt cycle of 4 ms by dividing the system clock, and executes the above-mentioned game progress interrupt process (PTC0 interrupt process) at this interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, the non-maskable interrupt is generated when the main board 102 detects a power-off and outputs a power-off signal, and the power-off signal is input to a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) (not shown).

The game progress interruption processing is monitored by an interruption processing time monitoring means, and the interruption processing time monitoring means may be initialized and restarted within a timeout time set in the function setting of the program management area of the CPU 501. If not possible, a timeout occurs and a user reset occurs. Then, the core of the CPU 501 is reset, and the control start processing is executed. The restart of the interruption processing time monitoring means is executed when recursion information is set during the circulation processing in the control start processing and during the game progress interruption processing and the built-in timer is initialized.
<Random number on main board>

  Next, random numbers used in the main board 102 will be described. The random number in this embodiment is divided into a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for playing a game. The random numbers related to the actor's operation include the random number per symbol, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special symbol per symbol. There are seven types of symbol initial value random numbers.

  The normal symbol random number is a random number used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device. The value of the random number takes "0-282", and the size of the random number is 283. The updating method is to first add 1 to the previous random number, return it to 0 if the added result exceeds the maximum value, and if the random number has made one round, change the value of the initial value random number per ordinary symbol at that time to the ordinary symbol It is the value of the hit random number. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the left passage detection device 69a of the left operation port 68a or the right passage detection device 69b of the right operation port 68b. The number of random numbers to be won differs between the case of low probability and the case of high probability, 11 for low probability and 282 for high probability.

  The initial random number per symbol is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number per symbol and the end value of the random number per symbol. The value of the random number takes "0-282", and the size of the random number is 283. In the updating method, first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interruption, and is updated even when the game progress interruption is not being executed.

  The random number per special symbol is a random number used by the software to obtain a random number (hardware random number) generated by ch (channel) A of the random number circuit of the CPU 501 and to use the special symbol display device (70, 71) for a lottery. . The value of the random number takes "0-065535", and the magnitude of the random number is 65536. The updating method is to update once with two clocks of the crystal oscillator input to the RCK (random number clock) terminal of the CPU 501. The start value of the random number is a value based on the ID number of the CPU 501 and is changed every time the system is reset when the power is turned on (or off). The method of changing the random number sequence is to automatically update the random number sequence every time the random number sequence makes a round. The update time is a timing set by a clock obtained by dividing the clock input to the RCK terminal by two.

  The acquisition time differs depending on the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning opening 62 or the start winning detection device 75 of the second start winning opening 63. In the case of the start winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62, when the input signal changes from OFF to ON, a low level is input to the P0 terminal of the CPU 501, and the random number value (hardware The random number value of the random number) is stored in the random number value register (RA0D). The software acquires the internal random number (hardware random number) stored in the random number value register (RA0D) when determining that the input signal of the start winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 has changed from off to on. The random number per special symbol is a value obtained by adding a soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number.

  On the other hand, in the case of the start winning detection device 75 of the second start winning opening 63, when the input signal changes from off to on, a low level is input to the P1 terminal of the CPU 501, and the disturbance captured from the channel A of the random number circuit. The difference from the case of the start winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 is that the numerical value is stored in the random number value register (RA1D).

  For the random number per special symbol, the number of random number values to be won is, if the combination of symbols that the condition device will operate is displayed, that is, if the big hit, the condition device does not operate, and This is different from the case where the combination of symbols for which the special electric accessory is activated is displayed, that is, the case where a small hit occurs. The number of random numbers that will hit the jackpot differs between the case of the low probability and the case of the high probability, and is 164 for the low probability and 1640 for the high probability.

  On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in small hits is different between the first special symbol display unit 70 and the second special symbol display unit 71. The number of special symbol display sections 71 is 105.

  In addition, the random number per special symbol has a size of 65536, and is updated at a speed of one cycle in about 0.013 s (second).

  The soft random number per special symbol is a random number used for the lottery of the special symbol display device (70, 71), and is added to the obtained internal random number when the internal random number generated by chA of the random number circuit is obtained as described above. . The value of the random number takes "0-65520", and the magnitude of the random number is 65521. The update method is to first add 1 to the previous random number, return to 0 if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, and if the random number has made one round, specially set the value of the soft initial value random number per special symbol at that time This is the value of the soft random number per symbol. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the winning of the game ball is detected by the starting winning detecting device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detecting device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.

  The soft initial value per special symbol random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the soft random number per special symbol and the end value of the soft random number per special symbol, and the value of the random number takes "0-65520", and the magnitude of the random number The height is 65521. In the updating method, first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interruption, and is updated even when the game progress interruption is not being executed.

  The special symbol per symbol random number is a random number used to determine a combination of symbols to be a big hit. The value of the random number takes "0-999", and the magnitude of the random number is 1000. The update method is to first add 1 to the previous random number, return to 0 if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, and if the random number has made one round, specially set the value of the soft initial value random number per special symbol at that time The value is a symbol random number per symbol. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the winning of the game ball is detected by the starting winning detecting device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detecting device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.

  The special symbol per pattern initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the symbol random number per special symbol and the end value of the symbol random number per special symbol, and the value of the random number is "0-999", and the size of the random number is The height is 1000. In the updating method, first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interruption, and is updated even when the game progress interruption is not being executed.

  The other random numbers used for the game include two types, that is, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number and a fluctuation pattern random number. Among them, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is a random number used for selecting a variation pattern of the ordinary symbol display device, and the value of the random number is “0 to 232” and the magnitude of the random number is 233. In the updating method, first, 1 is added to the previous random number, and when the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection devices 69a and 69b of the operating ports 68a and 68b.

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number used for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol display device (70, 71). The value of the random number ranges from "0 to 49999" and the magnitude of the random number is 50,000. In the updating method, first, 3511 is subtracted from the previous random number, and if the subtraction result is less than 0, 50,000 is added to the subtraction result. The update timing is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the winning of the game ball is detected by the starting winning detecting device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detecting device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.
<< Power off processing >>

  Next, a power-off process performed when a power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the power-off processing, the data of all the registers used are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enabled / disabled state before the power-off is stored (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83). If the information is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). Move to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information of normal power-off is stored in the RWM (S86), and the checksum of the RWM is calculated. Then, the checksum data is stored (S87). Then, the RWM is prohibited from being accessed (S88), and the CPU 501 waits for a reset of the CPU 501 while looping the control process.

Further, in this power-off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive unit, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information The information is set, the clock for monitoring of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the clock is recursed. Further, in the present embodiment, the forcible setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and at a timing before the process of saving all the used registers (S81). Have been done. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started with the monitoring clock returning. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring clock when a power failure occurs, in the control process immediately after restarting the power supply, it is possible to prevent the control process from proceeding without the monitoring clock recurring. Has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control Mode Regarding Command Transmission Timing >>

In the present embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is temporarily stored in a command buffer in response to a command request before transmission. The command buffer is obtained by causing a plurality of buffers to function as a ring buffer. In a control process for command transmission (here, effect control command transmission process (S69)), one command buffer is stored in the command buffer in the order of accumulation. In the game progress interrupt processing, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. Note that it is also possible to adopt a method in which commands set with higher priorities are transmitted first. In addition, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, the command can be transmitted as needed. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interruption process, the effect commands are transmitted collectively in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69). Instead, each time command transmission is required, command transmission is performed sequentially in each control processing module. For this reason, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the next and subsequent game progress interrupt processing. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command at the time of the start winning or the command transmission at the time of the start of the change of the special symbol, and the prompt command processing can be performed.
<< Control mode related to update of pending storage >>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is adopted, and the execution order of the first and second plurality of games is provided with regularity. Is sequentially performed for each second game or first game. Therefore, if only the information stored and held is updated for each second game or first game, the update of the information stored and held is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of giving priority to the first game or not giving priority to any game, the starting storage is completed and the storing is completed in the order of storing the storing (winning order). Such a configuration can be adopted. In the case where a configuration in which the hold storage is exhausted in the order of occurrence of the start winning prize is adopted, the update of the hold storage information according to the exhaustion, the update of the total suspension number of a plurality of games, and the storing of the winning order are performed. This makes it possible to update the information stored and stored as a whole.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to inform the sub main board 301 that the pending storage has been updated, a request for the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above. By including both the symbol 1 storage number command and the symbol 2 storage number command in one command, the necessary program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control Mode for Variation Pattern Lottery >>

  Subsequently, various modes related to the lottery of the variation pattern will be described. The mode of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied to one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. When a plurality of aspects are used in combination, for example, it is possible to selectively use the aspects based on factors such as a pass / fail result.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of the variation pattern is made based on the success / failure result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (special symbol status information). The variation pattern table which is used as an element and corresponds to a combination of these determining elements is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time paired with the variation pattern using the variation pattern random number is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the win / loss lottery is a big hit or not. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked to these. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked to these based on the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the random number. Among these, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time in the production is given is based on the production state (presence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group, and the re-lottery time is given. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

  Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine additional variation information according to the determined variation pattern number, and to determine a subsequent variation time based on the variation additional information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the variation time according to the fact after the fact.

  In addition, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol as described above, the variation determined in advance on the sub-main board 301 in relation to elements such as the game state and the hit symbol. An effect of adding the additional time later to the time can be performed. In this manner, in the case of determining the fluctuation time of the comprehensive effect symbol in such a manner, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as described below. It is. That is, in the case of performing the pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo ream”) described above, if the fluctuating patterns of the pseudo reams are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuating patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to be kept. When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main substrate 301 are prepared for the variable patterns individually determined on the main substrate 102, the total number of the fluctuation patterns on the main substrate 102 is large. As a result, for example, the number may reach about 256. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and bytes for representing the code as compared with the related art.

  However, by using the variation additional information (variation additional pattern), it is possible to form a variation pattern ex-post by connecting, for example, random variation lottery variation additional information to a relatively small number of basic variation patterns. It is. Then, a new variation pattern can be formed by a combination of the variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. Note that the random number value related to the variation addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 as a command for a pre-reading effect when a start winning prize occurs. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the addition of the variation additional information is easily performed when the limited frequency pattern effect is performed. In addition, if an example of using the variation additional information is further cited, if “777”, which is a certain variation symbol, is displayed from the beginning as a combination of the rendering symbols 190, the variation additional information is not set, and the combination of the rendering symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probable variable symbol "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to be promoted to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of the swing fluctuation or the development of the fluctuation mode). And the like to perform the effect) are set by setting additional fluctuation information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the referenced variation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four holds 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from the situation where the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage where the control process during the game progress interruption process being executed at that time has not yet determined the fluctuation pattern which is a process during the subsequent game progress interrupt process. When a new starting prize is generated, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, a variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be used as an element for determining the variation pattern.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the starting prize is not added from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern in the control processing. Note that any of the aspects can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a maximum number of holdings other than four (for example, eight) is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variation pattern random number can be at the time of the variation pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special accessory such as a special electric accessory, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, in order to aim for a fair game as compared with the random number of the success or failure, etc. The need to set constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variation pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of the start winning, but the variation pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variation pattern lottery as separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of pieces of information to be stored at the time of the start winning can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and the memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to designation of symbol >>

In the lottery of the symbol, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the symbol random number, and thereafter, the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number, etc. Is also possible. In the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the symbol random numbers is set to “0 to 999”, binary code codes of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of time savings is distributed to the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of rounds, the number of time savings, and the opening time of the special winning opening are determined according to the winning symbol. Or an open pattern may be determined. By doing so, there is no need to store and control data unique to the game state, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Further, a command (for example, in the present embodiment, each command of a symbol 1 effect pattern and a symbol 2 effect pattern) for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 is information for transmitting a game state (game state designation information). ) Can also be added. This command is not transmitted to the sub main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is transmitted to the sub main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special symbols and effect symbols' changing times >>

  As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the effect symbol 190 corresponding thereto are controlled so as to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. In some cases, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol 190 can be somewhat shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).

  That is, when the change of the special symbol or the change pattern is determined and the change of the special symbol is started, the change start command (command at the start of the change) of the effect symbol is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. However, the time required for transmission and reception of a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) and the time set in a command buffer (a ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) and waiting. It is conceivable that the influence of the time until all the commands (first-in first-out commands) are transmitted, etc., will delay the start of the variation of the effect symbol from the start of the variation of the special symbol. Further, at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol, a change stop command (a command at the time of determining the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301. ) May be delayed due to the time required for transmission and reception, and the degree of congestion in the command buffer (about the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set to a certain degree with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and the special symbol starts the next fluctuation by performing the swing fluctuation. The situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed later is avoided. The display during the swing fluctuation may extend to the next fluctuation due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, but since the number of commands transmitted to the sub-main board 301 is smaller at the end of the fluctuation than at the start of the fluctuation, the delay amount Is suppressed, and the effect symbol can be fixed almost certainly during the special symbol display fixing time.
<Control modes related to various announcement commands when starting a prize>

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment uses the main board 102 as advance information notification information when a game ball has won a start opening (the first start winning opening 62 or the second start winning opening 63). Then, various notice commands such as a symbol notice (a hit notice effect), a change notice (a pattern notice effect), and a hit notice (a hit notice effect) command are transmitted to the sub main board 301. These advance notice commands are transmitted as a part of the above-mentioned start prize winning command. On the sub-main board 301 side, using these various advance notice commands, the various pre-reading effects as described above are performed. Is executable. Hereinafter, the features of various notice commands in the present embodiment, control processing related to transmission of the notice commands, and the like will be described more specifically.
<< Pre-judgment of winning / losing result >>

  First, a description will be given of a mode of determining the result of the random lottery based on the random number acquired at the time of the start winning. As described above, in this embodiment, the random number value range in the first lottery and the second lottery is “0 to 65535” (see FIG. 8A), and the random number value range in this first lottery is “0 to 65535”. Are divided into a plurality of random value ranges. Then, as shown in FIG. 8A, in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range of “0 to 63238” and the random number value of “65535” have “outside”. A lottery result is assigned. In addition, the random number value range “63239 to 63402” is assigned “normal time probability change big hit”, and the random number range “63403 to 64878” is assigned “probability change time big hit”.

  Further, to the random number range “64879 to 65429”, “small hit” is assigned to the first lottery, and “out” is assigned to the second lottery. Further, “small hit” is assigned to the random number range “65430 to 65534” in both the first lottery and the second lottery. In other words, “small hit” is assigned to the special figure 1 and “small hit or miss” is assigned to the special figure 2 to the random number range of “64879 to 65534”.

  In addition, as described above, a group consisting of continuous numerical values is formed for each lottery result in the numerical range of the random number. The group whose random number value range is “0 to 63238” is the “outside” group on the lower limit side, and the numerical value range related to this group may be hereinafter referred to as “numerical value range a”. Further, the group whose random number value range is “63239 to 63402” is a group of “normal time probability change big hit”, and the numerical value range related to this group may be hereinafter referred to as “numerical value range b”. Furthermore, the group whose random number value range is “63403 to 64878” is the “probable change big hit” group, and the numerical range related to this group may be hereinafter referred to as “numerical range c”.

  Further, the group whose random number value range is “64879 to 65534” is a “small hit” group, and the numerical value range related to this group may be hereinafter referred to as “numerical value range d”. Further, “65535” is an “outside” group on the upper limit side, and the numerical range related to this group may be hereinafter referred to as “numerical range e”. In the present embodiment, the value belonging to the “outside” group on the upper limit side is only one of “65535”. However, for example, a range including a plurality of numerical values such as “65534 to 65535” is set to the “upper limit” side. It may be a "outside" group.

  It is possible to determine the result of the success / failure lottery by using the success / failure random number range thus grouped, for example, as in the following procedures (1) to (4). That is, first, a random number value is acquired as a procedure (1), and then, as a procedure (2), the upper limit value of the hit range is subtracted from the acquired random number value. Further, as a procedure (3), the lower limit of the hit range is subtracted from the random number value obtained in the procedure (1).

  Then, as the procedure (4), the relationship of (value resulting as a subtraction result of the procedure (2)) <0 (≦ 0 when the upper limit is included) is satisfied, and the result of the procedure (3) is obtained. If (value)> 0 (≧ 0 if the lower limit value is included), it is determined that the random number value obtained in (1) above is one of the random number values included in the random number range b of the first big hit. be able to.

  For example, when the probability change is described, in the above procedure (2), the upper limit value of the jackpot range is “64878”, and this value is subtracted from the acquired value of the random number. In the above procedure (3), “63239” is subtracted, and in the procedure (4), a condition (first condition) as to whether the calculation result of the procedure (2) becomes 0 or less is determined. Furthermore, if the first condition is satisfied, there is a possibility that the lottery result is a big hit, so a condition (second condition) as to whether the calculation result of the procedure (3) becomes 0 or more is determined. . If the second condition is satisfied, the random number value whose acquired value is a big hit belongs to the range, so that the big hit is determined.

  The present invention is not limited to such a procedure. For example, the operations of the above-mentioned procedure (2) and the procedure (3) are exchanged, and the lower limit value of the hit range is subtracted in the procedure (2). ) May be used to subtract the upper limit of the hit range.

  In addition, it is possible to determine the lottery result not only in the case of checking the range but also in the case of winning or losing lottery by, for example, an addition type or a subtraction type. Here, in the addition type lottery result confirmation, a predetermined value predetermined for each lottery result is added to the obtained random number value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value of the random number value range, the lottery result is determined. Is determined to have been won. On the other hand, in the subtraction type lottery result confirmation, a predetermined value predetermined for each lottery result is subtracted from the obtained random number value, and when the subtraction result (difference) falls below the lower limit value of the random number value range, the corresponding value is determined. It is determined that the lottery result has been won. Then, according to these addition or subtraction determination methods, the determination can be made with a smaller number of control processing times than when performing range confirmation.

  As described above, by performing the preliminary winning / non-performing judgment accompanying the starting winning, the above-mentioned command at the time of starting winning is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 with the content based on the result of the winning / rejecting lottery. Can be. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit notice effect as a pre-reading effect without waiting for the suspension to be exhausted, in relation to the result of determination as to whether or not it is correct.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the preliminary determination of the type of the special symbol and the preliminary determination of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol also include the determination based on the random number value range as in the case of the result of the above-mentioned winning / rejecting lottery. Is being done. The number of types of special symbols and the types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in a larger number than the types of the results of the winning / rejecting lottery, and the number of groups is larger than in the case of the winning / rejecting lottery. However, as a method of the preliminary determination based on the random value range, although the random value range and the type of the lottery result to be grouped are different, it can be performed in the same manner as the above-described preliminary determination regarding the pass / fail determination. . Therefore, a detailed description of the preliminary determination based on the random value range for the symbol advance effect and the pattern advance effect is omitted here.

  By performing the preliminary determination based on such a random value range, information can be rounded, and a command relating to the preliminary determination can be created with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random numbers exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if the information of the random number value is transmitted as it is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for pre-determination, information for identifying which random number was transmitted is transmitted by MODE, and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a command (MODE, EVENT) having a 2-byte configuration for storing and transmitting in EVENT must be transmitted twice in order to notify a random number value.

  However, as in the present embodiment, by converting the information into the information indicating the range to which the obtained random number belongs and transmitting the information to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced below the number of random numbers. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), the attribute of the obtained random number value can be converted into a command with the information amount of 1 byte.

In the present embodiment, the processing for the preliminary determination as described above is performed using the selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 23) and the like. Will be described later.
<Specific modes of various announcement commands at the time of start winning>

Next, among the various commands at the time of the start winning prize described above, more specific aspects of various notice commands such as a hit notice (hit notice effect) command will be described. In the following, the hit notice command is referred to as a "hit notice effect command", the symbol notice command is referred to as a "hit symbol notice effect command", and the variation notice command is referred to as a "pattern notice effect command".
<Winning announcement production command>

  The above hit announcement effect command is determined whether the random number acquired when the game ball wins the starting opening (the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63) corresponds to the hit or not. This is a command for informing the sub-main board 301 (see FIG. 4) of advance notice information (advance notice information) related to the relevant information.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 16A, the hit notice effect command is configured by a combination of a MODE command (D0H) and an EVENT command (00H to 04H). As shown in the figure, five types of hit notice effect commands 0 to 4 are assigned to 00H to 04H, which are EVENT commands of the hit notice effect commands. In the present embodiment, an outgoing notice effect is assigned to the EVENT command of 0 (00H).

  Also, the EVENT command of 1 (01H) includes a normal time probability variable big hit (see FIG. 8 (a)), which is a big hit regardless of whether the probability of the success / failure lottery is low (normal) or high. A notice effect is assigned, and the 2 (02H) EVENT command is assigned a notice effect for a probable change big hit (see FIG. 8 (a)) which becomes a big hit only when the probability of the success / failure lottery is high. ing. Further, to the EVENT command of 3 (03H), a notice effect of a small hit is assigned to the special figure 1 and a notice effect of a small hit or a loss is assigned to the special figure 2. In addition, a notice effect of a loss is assigned to the EVENT command of 4 (04H).

  On the side of the sub-main board 301 that has received such a hit notice effect command, based on the content of the notice effect command, the result of the success / failure lottery is a big hit, a small hit, or neither a big hit nor a small hit. It is possible to distinguish whether it is an outlier.

In the present embodiment, the EVENT commands 00H and 04H are set as outliers. However, the random number range 0 to 63238 (see FIG. 8A) corresponding to 00H is divided into two and the same outlier range is determined at the time of determining whether or not the command is valid. The command transmitted to the sub main board 301 may be divided into a plurality of commands. By doing in this way, a plurality of hit notice information can be provided for a miss, and among the random numbers corresponding to the miss, the sub-main side is controlled to distinguish whether or not the hold is to be a target of the prefetching advance notice. You can also. As such a control mode, for example, an EVENT command 00H is allocated to the random number 0 to 60000, an EVENT command 00H is allocated to the random number 60001 to 63238, and a prefetch lottery is performed when the EVENT command is 01H, and a prefetch lottery is performed when the EVENT command is 00H. Is not performed.
<Winning pattern announcement directing command>

Next, the above-described winning symbol announcement effect command will be described. The hit symbol announcement effect command is given to the sub-main board 301 with advance notice information (advance notice information) about which range the symbol random number belongs to when determining the type of the symbol (special symbol to be stopped) from the symbol random number. ). Further, the hit symbol announcement production command uses a different determination table between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 as described later, so that the special figure 1 is divided into twelve types of values. Are divided into nine types of values, but information of different contents is transmitted depending on whether the result of the lottery is out of place or the case of a big hit. Hereinafter, the winning symbol announcement effect command may be simply referred to as “symbol announcement effect command”.
<<< Symbol announcement notice production command related to loss >>>

  In the present embodiment, the winning symbol announcement effect command includes a MODE command (D1H) and an EVENT command (00H to 0BH or 00H to 08H) as shown in the "out" column in the middle section of FIG. Are configured. As shown in the figure, as for the special figure 1, twelve types of the hit symbol announcement effect commands 0 to 11 are assigned to the EVENT commands from 00H to 0BH. Nine types 0 to 8 are assigned to EVENT commands 00H to 08H.

  Then, regarding the loss lottery result according to the special figure 1, the symbol announcement effect command of “first loss” is assigned to the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 10 (09H). Similarly, regarding the loss lottery result according to Tokujin 1, a symbol announcement effect command of “second loss”, which is a type of loss different from “first loss”, is assigned to the EVENT command of 11 (0AH). ing.

  The above-mentioned “first miss” command and “second miss” command are both notified to the sub-main board 301 when the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is “miss”. Then, in this embodiment, if the result of the winning or losing lottery with respect to the symbol preview effect command of Toku-zu 1 is out of order, either “first out” or “second out” based on the value of the obtained symbol random number. That command is selected.

  In this way, by dividing the design notice effect command relating to the loss into a plurality of types, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect having a different tendency on the side of the sub main board 301 based on the difference in the type of the design command relating to the loss. Become. And the diversification of the look-ahead effect related to the loss becomes easy, and the diversity of the look-ahead effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the “first miss” command is widely used to indicate a general miss. On the other hand, the “second miss” command is used to indicate a narrower meaning miss than the “first miss” command. More specifically, the “first miss” command is associated with the entire miss without distinguishing the mode of the miss. On the other hand, the “second miss” command is used as a signal that indicates that there is an effect that can be developed to super reach when the corresponding special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, since the special figure 2 does not have the second deviation, the “second deviation” command is not allocated, and the “first deviation” is allocated to all nine types of EVENT commands. . For this reason, for Toku-zu 2, a command representing an out-of-order general is transmitted without distinguishing the type of the EVENT command.
<<< Symbol design notice production command for big hit >>>

  When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the above-mentioned winning symbol announcement effect command notifies the type of the big hit to the sub main board 301 side. In the present embodiment, as described above, 16R probability change, 4R probability change, and 4R normal jackpot are provided (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). Also, in FIGS. 9A and 9B and the description using these, the description is made assuming that there are only 10 types of special symbols “0” to “9” so that the description and illustration are not complicated. went.

  In the present embodiment, five types of “16R probability change 1” to “16R probability change 5” are provided as symbol preview effects corresponding to the special symbols “7” and “5” that are 16R probability change. In addition, there are provided four types of symbol announcement effects corresponding to the special symbols “3” and “1”, which are the above-mentioned 4R probability variations, “4R probability variation 1” to “4R probability variation 4”. As the symbol announcement effects corresponding to certain special symbols “0” and “2”, six types of “4R normal 1” to “4R normal 6” are provided. When the special jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section (70) or the second special symbol display section (71), a special display pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot is used. The design is displayed.

  In the "big hit" column in the middle section of FIG. 16 (a), the relationship between the type of big hit and the command according to the special figure 1 is shown on the left, and the type and command of the big hit according to the special figure 2 are shown on the right. The relationship is shown. Among these, for the special figure 1, the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 4 (04H) includes “16R certain change 1”, “16R certain change 2”, “16R certain change 3”, “16R certain change 4”, “16R certain change”. Five symbol announcement effects of “probable change 5” are respectively assigned. Similarly, for the special figure 1, the EVENT command of 5 (05H) to 7 (07H) includes “4R probability change 1”, “4R probability change 2”, and “4R probability change 4” among the various 4R probability changes described above. Three symbol announcement effects are assigned respectively.

  Similarly, with respect to the special figure 1, in the EVENT command of 8 (08H) and 9 (0BH), among the various 4R normals described above, two symbol announcement effects of “4R normal 1” and “4R normal 2” are provided. Each of the 10 (0AH) and 11 (0BH) EVENT commands is assigned a symbol announcement effect of “4R normal 3”.

Furthermore, regarding the special figure 2, the EVENT command of 0 (00H) to 3 (03H) includes four symbols of "16R certain change 1,""16R certain change 2,""16R certain change 3," and "16R certain change 4." Notice effects are assigned respectively. Similarly, in the special figure 2, two symbol announcement effects “4R certain change 1” and “4R certain change 3” are assigned to the EVENT commands of 4 (04H) and 5 (05H), respectively. Then, three symbol announcement effects of “4R normal 4”, “4R normal 5”, and “4R normal 6” are assigned to the EVENT commands of 6 (06H) to 8 (08H), respectively.
<Pattern notice production command>

  Next, the above-described pattern announcement effect command will be described. The pattern announcement effect command gives the sub-main board 301 advance notice information (advance notice information) related to the above-described fluctuation pattern random number (special figure fluctuation pattern random number) acquired at the time of starting winning. Further, the pattern announcement effect command is a command for notifying the sub-main board 301 of what numerical range the variation pattern random number acquired when the game ball wins at the starting port is included. .

In the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 16A, the pattern announcement effect command is constituted by a combination of a MODE command (D2H) and an EVENT command starting from 00H. Here, the effect patterns notified to the sub-main board 301 side by the pattern notice effect command are diversified according to various lottery results and differences in the game state as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 16A, the EVENT command of the pattern notice effect command is described as “00H to ?? H”, and the pattern notice effect is described as “pattern notice effect 0 to?”.
<Commonization of the hit design announcement command for the loss and big hit>

  Subsequently, a characteristic use of the above-described winning symbol announcement effect command will be described. As described above, there are provided two types of the symbol announcement effect command relating to the loss, “first loss” and “second loss”, of which the “second loss” command is the corresponding special symbol. The production during the fluctuation display indicates that it will evolve into super reach.

  Regarding the symbol announcement effect command, a common judgment value table is used irrespective of whether it is correct or not (refer to “hit symbol announcement judgment value table 1” in FIG. 31), and the value of the EVENT command of “second miss” is 11 ( 0BH), which is the same value as the EVENT command (0BH) representing a part of “4R normal” in “4R normal” which is one of the types of big hits. . For this reason, in the symbol announcement effect command as the advance notification information from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301, the specific loss “second loss” and the specific big hit “4R normal 3” are common. EVENT command.

  For this reason, in the main board 102, advance notification information (notification information) corresponding to a winning or super-reach or more effect can be notified to the sub-main board 301 side only by a hit symbol announcement effect command. The burden can be reduced.

  Here, the above “super reach or higher” means that the rank related to the jackpot expectation degree is equal to or higher than the super reach. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect patterns are roughly classified into three types: “no reach”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. The “normal reach” is an effect pattern in which the rank related to the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the “normal reach”. Furthermore, “super reach” is an effect pattern in which the rank related to the jackpot expectation degree is higher than “normal reach”. For this reason, “super reach or higher” does not include “no reach” and “normal reach”, which are lower in rank.

  Further, as described above, these effect patterns are further subdivided, and among them, the effect patterns grouped into “Super 1”, “Super 2”, “Super 3”, etc. Is provided. When the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the game proceeds to a jackpot effect through any of “super reach” at a rate of almost 100% at the time of the reserved digestion. Further, even if the result of the winning / rejecting lottery is a failure, an effect pattern that progresses to “super reach” and becomes a failure may be executed.

  If the result of the lottery is a big hit, the above “super reach or more” is guaranteed at 100% (or almost 100%) at a rate of 100% (or almost 100%), and the progress to the big hit effect via the “super reach” is guaranteed. Means that. If the result of the lottery is wrong, it means that progress to at least “super reach” is guaranteed at a rate of 100%.

  Also, as described above, by sharing the EVENT command relating to the “second miss” and the “4R normal 3”, the sub-main board 301 that has received the EVENT command (0BH) receives a hit announcement effect command or It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect related to a winning or super-reach or more effect pattern without confirming the pattern notice effect command. For this reason, on the sub main board 301 side, a determination for performing a look-ahead effect corresponding to an effect of super reach or more can be made simply based on only the symbol notice command.

  Further, on the sub main board 301 side, as described above, it is possible to determine the pre-reading effect based only on 11 (0BH) as the EVENT command related to the symbol notice command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit notice effect command, By referring to the pattern announcement effect command, the prefetch effect can be determined based on more information. In such a case, the number of combinations of information that can be referred to can be increased compared to the case where the effect pattern of the prefetch effect is determined based only on the symbol notice command, and the prefetch effect can be diversified. Becomes

Also in the main board 102, it is possible to create the information (prior judgment information) related to the preliminary judgment common to the loss and the big hit by referring to the symbol random number without referring to the information relating to the result of the winning / wreck lottery. Become.
<Relationship between the number of hit symbol announcement production commands related to the loss and the big hit>

  As described above, with regard to the symbol notice command in the present embodiment, the first result is assigned to the command 00 (00H) to 10 (0AH) in which the result of the winning / rejecting lottery according to the special figure 1 is “0”. , Command 11 (0BH) is assigned a “second miss” (see FIG. 16A). In addition, as for the miss according to the special figure 2, "first miss" is assigned to all commands of 00H to 08H.

  Furthermore, as for the command in the case of the result of the success / failure lottery, the 12 types of commands according to Toku-zu 1 and the 8 types of commands according to Toku-zu 2 have 16R probable changes 1 to 5 and 4R probable changes 1 to 5, respectively. 4, 4R Normally, any one of 1 to 6 is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the number of design notice commands handled as a shared EVENT command is the same as the second miss and 4R normal 3, one by one (one command). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where a plurality of missing symbols are provided, such as a second missing and a third missing, the second missing to the Nth missing (N is a natural number of N> 2). A specific EVENT command is selected for the range of the symbol random number that determines the number of EVENT commands, and the number of EVENT commands that can be selected from the range of the symbol random number corresponding to the second loss is set to 10 (0AH) and 11 (0BH). , Can be set as an EVENT command corresponding to a low profit big hit (4R normal 3).
<Restrictions on effects related to specific hit symbol announcement effect commands>

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a pre-reading effect of super reach or more is performed on the sub-main board 301 side based on a symbol notice command in which the EVENT command is 11 (0BH), the pre-reading effect pattern to be selected is selected. There are restrictions. The reason for setting the pre-reading effect in this way is as follows.

  That is, among the types of the big hits, the big hit of “4R normal” is a big hit in which the player's profit is the smallest in this embodiment as compared with the big hits of “16R certain change” and “4R certain change”. . And it can be understood that such a big hit with a small profit is a big hit close to a loss. Here, the "4R normal" big hit can be referred to as "minimum profit big hit", "low profit big hit" or the like, as compared with other big hits.

  Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, a look-ahead effect is performed in the same manner as a jackpot with a small profit or a big jackpot with a large profit such as "16R probable change" for a loss that only develops into a reach. In such a case, it is conceivable that the content of the effect and the magnitude of the profit become imbalanced, which may give a sense of incongruity or discouragement to the player.

  More specifically, in this embodiment, as described above, when the color of the hold display becomes red, gold, rainbow, or the like, a big hit occurs when the hold (also referred to as “trigger hold”) is consumed. The expected degree of occurrence increases. When the red, gold, or iridescent color is consumed, in the present embodiment, an effect pattern of super reach or more is developed at a rate of almost 100%. When the result of the lottery is out of order, the reserved look-ahead effect such as red, gold, or rainbow is hardly executed, and the reserved look-ahead effect such as red, gold, or rainbow is performed by the player. On the other hand, it is expected that the production at the time of suspension digestion will evolve to “super reach or more”.

  For this reason, when the effect of the change of the holding such as changing to red, gold, rainbow, or the like is performed in a situation where the held lottery result (holding lottery result) does not correspond to “4R normal”, It is considered that the player expects a big hit such as “16R probable change”. However, the suspended display changed to the suspended state moves to the above-mentioned variation information display unit 195 (see FIG. 7A), and the variation display of the special symbol is started, and then the variation display of the special symbol ends, and “ At the stage where the lottery result of "4R normal" is confirmed and notified, the degree of discouragement of the player can be very large.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the EVENT command 11 (0BH) shared by the “second miss” and the “4R normal” is received on the side of the sub main board 301, the prefetch is performed as described above. Direction is restricted. That is, when the EVENT command 11 (0BH) which is a specific EVENT command among the EVENT command commands 00 (00H) to 11 (0BH) according to the symbol notice of the special figure 1 is received, other information is received. Then, the number of types of effects that can be selected as advance effects such as changes in suspension is limited to a smaller number, and the type of advance effects is determined. The content of the restriction of the prefetching may be such that, for example, in the mode in which the expectation of the big hit is higher than the predetermined suspension display for the suspension change prefetching, the suspension display is not performed. More specifically, when the shared EVENT command 11 (0BH) is issued, the lottery table is switched or used as an argument of the lottery table, and only the limited effect is determined as a lottery target. For example, only the red change is executed, and the change of the premium (big hit determination) such as gold or rainbow is not executed.

  Therefore, it is possible to resemble the specific outlier and the tendency to produce a jackpot with a small profit with similarity. As a result, it is possible to easily balance the content of the look-ahead effect and the content of the jackpot profit, and it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player when a jackpot with a small profit is acquired. In addition, as described above, such a balanced look-ahead effect is performed by a simple process using the EVENT command 11 (0BH) having a common value for the “second loss” and the “4R normal”. It is possible.

  In addition, as a processing mode for performing a restriction such that execution is performed only until a red change, for example, even if an effect pattern is selected with a change to gold or iridescent, the selected effect pattern is canceled. It is conceivable that an effect pattern is selected again and an effect pattern that is executed only up to red is selected again. It is also conceivable that an effect pattern including a reserved change such as gold or rainbow is excluded from selection targets in advance, and an effect pattern related to pre-reading is selected from those that are executed only up to red.

  Further, in the above-described specific example, when the hold display changes to red, gold, rainbow, or the like, the super-reach is performed at a rate of almost 100% while the effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol is being performed. Although the above-described effects are performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to be super reach or more (at a rate of 100%). Furthermore, when the hold display is red, an effect of super reach or more is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and when the hold display is gold or rainbow color, the super reach is always performed (at a rate of 100%). The above effects may be executed. Further, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit may be definitely displayed through the super reach (at a rate of 100%). Further, the limitation on the prefetching effect may be applied to a prefetching effect other than the change in hold.

Further, in this embodiment, as one mode of the hit, a small hit is provided in addition to the big hit, and a plurality of types of symbols are associated as the small hit symbol. However, with regard to the small hit, a notice effect relating to the small hit is not performed as a prefetch effect based on the advance notification information.
<Various processes executed on the main board for pre-reading effect>

  Next, various processes executed on the main board 102 for the above-described prefetching effect will be described. Then, here, the starting opening monitor control process (S56), the special symbol change start monitor control process (S60) executed in the above-described game progress interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and various types of processes executed in connection with these. (Subroutine) will be described.

  The processes executed in connection with the start-up opening monitoring control process (see S56 in FIG. 13 and FIG. 17) include a start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) and an operation pending ball number update process (see FIG. 20). ), Counter addition processing, signal output request processing, random number storage processing, notice effect determination processing (see FIG. 21), selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 22), command request setting processing, symbol storage number command request processing, and the like.

The special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see S60 in FIG. 13, FIG. 23) executed in connection with the special symbol variation start monitoring process (see FIG. 24), the special symbol hit determination process, the symbol Decision processing (see FIG. 25), selection number acquisition processing, byte data acquisition processing, 1-byte selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 26), time saving number determination processing, special motor combination setting processing, fluctuation pattern mode setting processing, demonstration effect time There are setting processing, RWM clear processing, and the like.
<Starting port monitoring control process>

  The starting opening monitoring control process (see FIG. 17) monitors the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 62) and the starting opening 2 (second starting winning opening 63) of the game ball as described above. belongs to. Of these, in the monitoring of the starting opening 1 winning of the game ball, in order to monitor the starting opening 1 winning of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring process (FIG. 27) is performed using the address of the starting opening 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument. 18, see FIG. 19). Details of the above-described starting port 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) and the starting port monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) will be described later.

  In the above-described monitoring of the winning opening of the game ball 2, in order to monitor the winning of the starting hole 2 of the game ball, the value of the validity flag of the opening 2 is checked. Then, as a result of the inspection, when the value of the starting port 2 valid period flag is the starting port 2 valid period data (here, 01H), the starting port monitoring process (see FIG. 27) is performed using the address of the starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument. 18, see FIG. 19). Details of the above-described starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) will be described later.

  FIG. 17 shows a flowchart of the starting port monitoring control process. In the starting port monitoring control process, the address of the starting port 1 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S101), and the starting port monitoring process (S102) is executed. In the starting port monitoring process (S102), as described later, a starting winning is monitored for each starting port, and in a predetermined case, various random numbers are obtained and a command transmission request is issued. As described above, the details of the starting port monitoring process (S102) will be described later.

  Subsequently, the value of the startup port 2 valid period flag is loaded (S103), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value differs from the startup port 2 valid period data (here, 01H) (S104). If the loaded value is not different from the startup port 2 validity period data (S104: NO), the address of the startup port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S105), and the startup port related to the startup port 2 is set. The monitoring process (S106) is executed.

  Here, the same control module is used for the above-described start-up port monitoring process for the start-up port 1 (S102) and for the start-up port monitoring process for the start-up port 2 (S106).

  When the start-up monitoring process (S106) for the start-up opening 2 is completed, the process goes to the return (RET), and shifts to a process after the start-up monitoring control process (S56) in the game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13). If the loaded value is different from the startup port 2 validity period data in the determination processing in S104 described above (S104: YES), the process returns (RET) without proceeding to S105.

  S103 and S104 described above are processes for determining the validity period of the starting port 2 after the starting port monitoring process (S102) for the starting port 1. The reason why the validity period of the starting port 2 is determined is that the opening port 2 (the second starting winning port 63) is a normal electric accessory as described above in the present embodiment. This is effective only for entering the ball during the expanding period and for a predetermined grace period after the closing of the opening and closing blades, and in order to prevent the monitoring of the starting port related to the starting port 2 during other periods. .

  The above-described start-up opening 1 monitoring table and start-up opening 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) are used in the start-up opening monitoring process when a ball is detected to enter the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63. It defines necessary data for various kinds of handling information subject to the above.

As shown in FIG. 27, as the handling information defined in the starting port 1 monitoring table and the starting port 2 monitoring table, starting port 1 (or 2) switch bit data, special figure 1 (or 2) operation suspension Address of ball number (lower), special figure 1 (or 2) address of random number transfer table (lower), special figure 1 (or 2) address of random number transfer table (higher), RL0 hard latch random number register 0 (or 1) ) Address (lower order). Further, the starting port 1 monitoring table and the starting port 2 monitoring table (see FIG. 27) include special symbol 1 (or 2) operation data, the address (lower order) of the hit symbol notice determination value table 1 (or 2), and the hit symbol. The address (upper rank) of the notice determination value table 1 (or 2), the data of EVENT (the initial value of the hit symbol notice effect command 0), and the like are also defined.
<Starting port monitoring process>

  Next, the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) will be described. In this start-up monitoring process, the start-up prize of the game ball (start-up prize at the first start-up prize opening 62 or the second start-up prize opening 63) is monitored and the above-mentioned built-in random number (hardware random number) is obtained. Further, when the number of balls reserved for special design operation (reserved number) is less than four, when the starting prize of the game ball is confirmed, a random number per special symbol (win / fail random number) is obtained, and a random number related to the special symbol (design random number) is obtained. ), The command transmission request of the announcement effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting opening, and the number of activated balls of the special symbol display device (70, 71) (the number of activated special balls (number of retained symbols)). The corresponding command transmission requests are performed in order.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Monitor the start of the game ball and obtain a built-in random number

In the above-described monitoring of the starting ball winning of the game ball and the acquisition of the internal random number, the input data base address (here, the starting port 1 (or 2) is used in order to monitor the starting ball winning of the game ball and obtain the internal random number. ) Using the head address of the monitoring table) as an argument, the operation pending ball number update processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. The details of the operation pending ball number update processing (see FIG. 20) will be described later. Then, as a result of executing the operation-reserved ball count updating process (see FIG. 20), when it is confirmed that the operation-reserved ball count has been updated, when the special symbol operation-reserved ball count is less than 4, the game ball is placed in the starting port. Judge that a prize has been won. As will be described later, random number data is acquired in the operation pending ball number update processing (see FIG. 20), and the acquired random number data is used as a built-in random number. Note that the base address refers to an address value required for processing during execution stored in a register (HL register) in the CPU 501 of the main board 102.
2. Acquisition of random numbers per special symbol

In the above-described acquisition of the special symbol random number (acceptance random number), the value of the special symbol soft random number is added to the built-in random number (hard random number) acquired in the operation pending ball number update processing (S111) as the special symbol random number. Then, the random number per special symbol in the RWM storage area, which is the storage destination of the random numbers to be reserved, is stored.
3. Storage of random numbers related to special symbols (symbol random numbers)

  In the storage of the random numbers related to the special symbols (symbol random numbers) described above, in order to store the random numbers related to the special symbols, the input data base address (the starting address of the starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + table offset. The two-byte address indicated by 2 (2) is used as a random number transfer table address, and the obtained random number transfer table address is used as an argument to execute a random number storage process. Details of the random number storage processing will be described later.

Here, the notation of “table offset A (N)” (N is a natural number including 0) like “table offset 2 (2)” indicates the table offset amount, and “A” is a variable name. And “N” represents a value. For example, “table offset 2 (2)” indicates that the data of the offset amount stored in the area of “table offset 2” is “02H”. For example, in the case of “table offset 0 (0)”, it indicates that the data of the offset amount stored in the area of “table offset 0” is “00H”, and “table offset 8 (8)”. "Indicates that the data of the offset amount stored in the area of" table offset 8 "is" 08H ". Further, the table offset is stored as a calculated value at a predetermined address of the RWM, and is programmed so as to directly address an arbitrary table offset A (N).
4. Request transmission of a notice effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning opening

In the above-described command transmission request of a preview effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of the start opening winning, in order to make a command request of the preview effect corresponding to the random number stored at the time of the starting winning, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and the command transmission period is checked. When it is determined, the winning / not-presenting effect request, the winning / symbol-notifying-effect request, and the pattern-announcement-requesting request are made in order using the random number of the success / failure, the symbol random number, and the random number of the variation pattern.
(1) Checking the status of gaming machines

  In the state check of the gaming machine described above, when any of the following conditions (first to third conditions) is satisfied, it is determined that the command transmission period is set. First, the first condition is to store a random number related to the special symbol 1 while waiting for a hit and while the probability changing function of the ordinary symbol display device is not operating.

  Then, as described above, when the value of the special game status is 0, it is determined that it is in the hit waiting state. When the value of the ordinary symbol mode flag is 0, and when the content of the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is the special symbol 1 operation data (00H), the probability fluctuation of the ordinary symbol display device It is determined that the random number related to the special symbol 1 is stored while the function is not operated.

  The second condition is that the random number relating to the special symbol 2 is stored while waiting for a hit and while the probability changing function of the ordinary symbol display device is operating. Then, when the value of the special game status is 0, it is determined that the game is in the hit waiting state. When the value of the ordinary symbol mode flag is 1 and the content of the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is the special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH), the probability fluctuation of the ordinary symbol display device It is determined that the random number related to the special symbol 2 is stored while the function is not operated.

The third condition is to store a random number related to the special symbol 2 during a big hit or a small hit. If the value of the above-mentioned special electric game status is other than 0, and if the content indicated by the input data base address + table offset 5 (5) is the special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH), the medium hit or the small hit It is determined that the random number related to the special symbol 2 is to be stored. The conditions of the command transmission period based on the gaming state are provided for the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment to control the pre-reading effect by the main board 102. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when controlling whether or not to perform pre-reading on the sub-main board 301, a notice command may always be transmitted regardless of conditions. The condition of the main board 102 also depends on the specification of the gaming machine (for example, the winning order in the special figures 1 and 2), and is stored in advance by storing the random number of the special symbol 2 while the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display device is not operating. Various changes, such as transmitting information, are possible.
(2) Winning notice production request

Further, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the case of a winning announcement effect request when it is determined that the command transmission period is reached, the address of the winning announcement determination value table (see FIG. 31) and the special symbol A notice effect determination process is performed using the value obtained by adding +1 to the value of the random number buffer, MODE (hit notice effect) data (D0H), and EVENT (data initial value (00H) as arguments. The details of the notice effect judgment process will be described later. I do.
(3) Request for a winning design notice

Also, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the case of the winning symbol announcement effect request when it is determined that the command transmission period has been reached, the input data base address (starting port 1 (or 2) The lower address of the hit symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31) is obtained from the 2-byte address indicated by the start address of the monitoring table + table offset 6 (6), and the hit symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31) is obtained. Furthermore, the value of the special symbol symbol random number, MODE (hit symbol announcement effect) data (D1H), and the contents indicated by the input data base address + table offset 8 (8) (the initial value of event data (00H)) are used as arguments. A notice effect determination process (see FIG. 21) is executed. As described above, the details of the announcement effect determination processing (see FIG. 21) will be described later.
(4) Pattern notice production request

  Also, as a result of checking the state of the gaming machine, in the case of a pattern announcement effect request when it is determined that the command transmission period has been reached, in order to make a pattern announcement effect request, the address of the pattern announcement determination value table, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number, and the MODE ( A notice effect determination process is performed using the pattern notice effect) data (D2H) and the EVENT data initial value (00H) as arguments. As described above, the details of the announcement effect determination processing will be described later.

Here, of the winning announcement effect request, the winning symbol announcement effect request, and the pattern announcement effect request, only the winning symbol announcement effect request is calculated in the starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table to calculate the address of the judgment value table. This is because the table used in the special symbols 1 and 2 is changed only for the winning symbol notice (see FIG. 16A). Accordingly, in the case of the hit notice effect request and the pattern notice effect request, when the notice determination value table to be referred to is similarly switched according to the start ports 1 and 2 and other game states (such as the number of retained balls), the start port 1 (or 2) is used. It is possible to design so that the address calculation value of the notice determination value table is stored in the monitoring table.
5. Command transmission request corresponding to the number of pending balls of the special symbol display device

  In response to the command transmission request corresponding to the number of activated balls of the special symbol display devices (70, 71) described above (the number of reserved special operation balls (number of reservations)), the operation of the special symbol display device 1 and the special symbol display device 2 is performed. In order to request an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls, a symbol storage number command request process is executed. This symbol storage number command requesting process is performed using the same control module as the symbol storage number command requesting process (S12) in the above-described control start process (see FIGS. 11 and 12). The details of the symbol storage number command request process will be described later.

  18 and 19 show a flowchart of the above-described start-up port monitoring process executed in the start-up port monitoring control process (see FIG. 17). In this start-up opening monitoring process, first, an operation pending ball number update process (S111) is performed. The operation pending ball number update processing (S111) includes acquisition of a built-in random number (hard random number used for calculating a pass / fail random number), monitoring of a game ball passing through a switch, updating of the operation pending ball number, and requesting output of the external information 2. It performs the creation and the like (see FIG. 20), the details of which will be described later.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the operation pending ball number has been updated (S112). If the operation pending ball number has not been updated (S112: YES), the process exits the start-up port monitoring process and returns. If the number of active balls is updated (S112: NO), the value of the soft random number per special symbol is loaded (S113), and random number data (built-in random number) is added to the loaded value (S114). Further, the addition result is stored in a special symbol per random number buffer (S115), and the contents of the data base address (start address of starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + table offset 2 (2) as the random number transfer table address (random number) The address (lower order) of the transfer table is loaded (S116), and a random number storage process is executed (S117).

  Here, the above-described four processes from S113 to S116 are for calculating (adding) a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number) related to the above-mentioned pass / fail random number. The details of the random number storage process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the value of the special electric game status is loaded (S118), and if the loaded value is 0 (S119: YES), the value of the ordinary symbol mode flag is loaded as inspection data (S122). On the other hand, if the loaded value is not 0 in S119 described above (S119: NO), the contents of the data base address (start address of starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + table offset 5 (5) (special symbol) 1 (2) operation data) (S120). Further, it is determined whether or not the loaded value is the special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH) (S121). If it is the special symbol 2 operation data (0FFH) (S121: YES), the processes of S122 to S124 are performed. Instead, the processing of S125 described above is executed.

  Here, the result of the determination in S119 described above is YES if the vehicle is in the middle of a big hit (or a small hit), and is NO if the hit is a big hit. Further, the determination result of S121 executed when the determination result of S119 is during the big hit is YES if the special hit is during the big hit of Toku-zu 2 and NO if the hit is the big hit of Toku-zu 1 is there.

  If the result of the determination in S119 is YES (normal) (S119: YES), the content of the data base address + table offset 5 (5) is added to the inspection data (S123), and the addition result becomes 0. If not (S124: NO), the address of the table of the hit notice determination value is set (S125).

  On the other hand, in S124, if the addition result is 0 (S124: NO), a symbol storage number command request process (S139) described later is executed without performing the processes after S125 (S125 to S138). Here, S119 to S124 described above are processing for determining the second condition related to the above-described “(1) Checking the state of the gaming machine”. The contents of the processing of S119 to S124 are such that the advance notice information for pre-reading is stored for the suspension related to the special figure 2 during the time reduction, and the advance notice information is not stored for the special figure 1.

  It should be noted that, for example, in a predetermined situation such as a timing in which the player exits during working hours from non-working hours, it is considered that it is not particularly necessary to perform a look-ahead effect to increase the player's expectations. Therefore, according to the above-described S122 to S124, the notice information is not generated in the case of such a specific timing, and the prefetching effect is not executed at a timing that is not necessarily effective. Is also good.

  Subsequent to S125, the value of the random number buffer per special symbol is loaded as random number data 1 (S126), and the random number data is incremented by 1 (S127). Further, MODE (hit notice effect) data (D0H) is set as MODE data, and EVENT (hit notice effect 0) data (00H) is set as EVENT data (S128). Then, a notice effect determination process (S129) is executed. The details of this announcement effect determination processing (S129) will be described later.

  Here, the aforementioned S128 clears the EVENT data related to the hit announcement effect command created last time. Then, by the process of S128, the EVENT data of the hit announcement effect command is prevented from being a value outside the predetermined range (here, 00H to 04H).

  Subsequently, the content of the data base address + table offset 6 (6) is loaded as the hit symbol notice determination value table address (S130), and the value of the special symbol random number is loaded as the random number data 2 (S131). Further, MODE (hit symbol announcement effect) data (D1H) is set in the MODE data (S132), and the contents of the data base address + table offset 8 (8) are loaded in the EVENT data (S133). After that, as shown in FIG. 19, a preview effect determination process (S134) described later is executed.

  Subsequently, the address of the pattern notice determination value table is set (S135), and the value of the variation pattern random number is loaded as random number data 3 (S136). Further, MODE (pattern notice effect) data (D2H) is set as MODE data, and EVENT (pattern notice effect 0) data (00H) is set as EVENT data (S137). Then, a later-described announcement effect determination process (S134) is executed, and a symbol storage number command request process (S139) is executed, and the process returns. The details of the symbol storage number command request processing (S139) will be described later.

  Here, S137 described above clears the EVENT data relating to the previously created pattern announcement effect command. Then, by the processing of S137, the EVENT data of the pattern announcement effect command is prevented from being a value outside the predetermined range.

In addition, the determination result in S121 described above is YES when the hold storage for the operation according to Toku-zu 2 is performed, and NO when the hold storage for the operation according to Toku-zu 1 is performed. If the determination is NO in S121 (S121: NO), the above-described symbol storage number command request processing (S139) is executed without performing other processing. Thus, during the big hit (small hit), the control is performed so that the advance notice information regarding the pre-reading is stored only for the special figure 2.
<Operation pending ball number update processing>

  Next, the above-described operation pending ball number update process (see S111 in FIG. 18) will be described. In this operation pending ball number update process (see FIG. 20), after the internal random number is obtained, the game ball is monitored for passing through the switch, and if it is determined that the game ball is passing the switch, the operation pending ball is determined. The number is updated and an output request for the external information 2 is created.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Get internal random numbers

In the above-described acquisition of the built-in random number, the input base address (start address of the starting port 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + the content indicated by the table offset 4 (4) (RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 (or 1)) ) Is the lower address of the built-in random number, the top address of the built-in register (0FEH) is the built-in random number upper address, and the built-in random number indicating the storage area that stores the random number hard-latched when the start-up winning is detected by the sensor. Obtained as an internal random number from the address (register address).
2. Monitor game ball passing through switch

In monitoring the switch of a game ball, the value of the board switch rising edge and the input data base address (start address of the start-up port 1 (or 2) monitoring table) + The logical product of the contents indicated by the table offset 0 (0) is taken, and if the result of the logical product is not 0, it is determined that the game ball has passed the switch. Thereby, when the game ball passes through the switch, the following processing is executed if the flag indicating that the entering ball is detected is set, and if the flag is not set, the subsequent processing is not performed. It has become.
3. Updating the number of active balls

In the update of the number of operation-holding balls, the counter is set with the input data base address + the content indicated by the table offset 1 (1) and the maximum value of the operation-holding ball number (4) as arguments. Execute addition processing. Details of this counter addition processing will be described later. It should be noted that whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls has been incremented by one is reflected in a flag. As a result, the value of the suspended number at that time is stored.
4. Creating an output request for external information 2

  In the creation of the output request for the external information 2 described above, a signal output request process is executed using the address of the starting port information timer + 1 as an argument in order to create the output request for the external information 2. Details of the signal output request processing will be described later.

  FIG. 20 shows a flowchart of the operation pending ball number update process. In this operation pending ball number update processing, first, a built-in register head high-order address (0FEH) is set as a built-in random number high-order address (S141). Further, the content of the data base address + table offset 4 (4) is loaded as the internal random number lower address (S142), and the content of the internal random number address is loaded as random number data (S143). Then, the value of the rising edge of the panel switch is loaded (S144), and the logical product of the loaded value and the contents of the data base address + the table offset 0 (0) is obtained (S145).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product in S145 is 0 (S146). If it is not 0 (S146: NO), the content of the data base address + table offset 1 (1) is set as the RWM lower address. It is loaded (S147). Further, the maximum value (4) of the number of active balls is set (S148), and a counter addition process (S149) is executed. Details of the counter addition processing (S149) will be described later.

Thereafter, the address +1 of the starting port information timer is set as the RWM address (S150), the signal output request processing (S151) is executed, and the routine returns. Here, if the result of the logical product is 0 in S146 described above (S146: YES), the process returns without performing the processing of S147 to S151. The details of the signal output request processing (S151) will be described later.
<Counter addition processing>

Next, the above-described counter addition processing (see S149 in FIG. 20) will be described. In the counter addition process (S149), if the contents of the RWM indicated by the input counter lower address and the RWM head upper address (0F0H) are smaller than the input counter maximum value, the content of the input counter address is incremented by +1. I do. Whether or not the content of the counter address is incremented by one is reflected in the flag.
<Signal output request processing>

Next, the aforementioned signal output request processing (see S151 in FIG. 20) will be described. In this signal output request processing (S151), to update the signal output request, if the content indicated by the input RWM address is less than 255, the content indicated by the input RWM address is incremented by one. This signal output request process is also called in the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62) and the like in the above-mentioned game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13), and after generating various signal information, in S70 (see FIG. 13). The information is output to the management computer of the game store by the external information output process.
<Random number storage processing>

  Next, the above-described random number storage processing (see S117 in FIG. 18) will be described. In the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIG. 18), only the random number transfer table address (lower order) was called in the process (S116) preceding the random number storage process (S117). The upper address is called in parentheses. More specifically, in this random number storage process, the input random number transfer table address is used to determine the number of operation pending spheres corresponding to the number of operation pending spheres to which random numbers of the transfer source (random number buffer) are transferred. By transferring to the random number storage area, random numbers are stored for the pass / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number. The lower address of the operation pending sphere as the transfer destination is a value obtained by adding the multiplication result of the value of the number of operation pending spheres and the number of transfer bytes and the lower address of the head address of the transfer RWM address. The upper address of the area is the RWM head upper address (0F0H).

Also, the random number transfer table address, the address of the number of pending operation balls, and the like are determined in a start-up port 1 (or start-up port 2) monitoring table (see FIG. 27), which will be described later, and are read from these tables.
<Preliminary production judgment process>

  Next, the aforementioned announcement effect determination processing (see S129, S134, and S138 in FIG. 18) will be described. In this preview effect determination process, after performing the preview effect determination, a command request for the preview effect corresponding to the result of the preview effect determination is performed.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Notice production judgment

In the above-described announcement effect determination, a selection number acquisition process is performed using the input address of the announcement effect determination value table, the input random number data, and the EVENT data as arguments in order to perform the announcement effect determination. Details of the selection number acquisition processing will be described later.
2. A command request for a notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination

  In the command request of the notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect judgment described above, in order to make a command request of the notice effect corresponding to the result of the notice effect judgment, the input MODE data and the selection number obtained in the notice effect judgment are inputted. Execute the command request setting process as an argument. Details of the command request setting process will be described later.

  FIG. 21 shows a flowchart of the notice effect determination processing. In the starting port monitoring process, a selection number obtaining process (S161) and a command request setting process (S162) are sequentially performed. Details of the selection number acquisition processing (S161) and the command request setting processing (S162) will be described later.

Here, such an announcement effect determination process is a process that is executed three times in total in the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) (S129, S134, S148). Then, this announcement effect determination processing is performed for each of the hit announcement, the hit symbol announcement, and the pattern announcement, which are the information (transmission information) to be transmitted to the sub-main board 301, in a numerical range corresponding to any one of the lottery results of the target random numbers. This is a process for determining whether the item belongs.
<Selection number acquisition processing>

  Next, the aforementioned selection number acquisition processing (see S161 in FIG. 21) will be described. In the selection number acquisition process, a selection number corresponding to the input random number data is determined from the input drawing table address and the input selection number.

  More specifically, the selection number input as the number setting value is set, and the random number comparison value of the input drawing table is sequentially subtracted from the input random number data. If the subtraction result is less than 0, the calculated number setting value is set to the selection number to be output, and the process ends. When the subtraction result is 0 or more, the process is continued by incrementing the number setting value by +1. When the higher order of the random number comparison value is FFH, the lower order of the random number comparison value is added to the number setting value without performing the subtraction. Continue processing.

  FIG. 22 shows a flowchart of the selection number acquisition process. In this selection number acquisition processing, first, the contents of the drawing table address + 1 (data having a higher random number comparison value in the current determination) are loaded as inspection data (S171). Further, the loaded value is incremented by 1 (S172). If the addition result is 0 (S173: NO), the contents of the drawing table address (data of the lower random number comparison value in the current determination) are added to the selection number. (S174). Then, the drawing table address is incremented by +2 in order to refer to the next random number comparison value in the next determination (S178), and the process returns to S171.

  In S173 described above, if the addition result is not 0 (that is, if the data with the higher random number comparison value this time is not FFH) (S173: YES), the content of the drawing table address is subtracted from the random number data (S175). Then, if the subtraction result is not less than 0 (S176: NO), the selection number is incremented by 1 (S177), and the process of S178 is executed. If the subtraction result is less than 0 in S176 described above (S176: YES), the current selection number is determined and the process returns. Here, in S175 described above, what is subtracted from the random number data is 2-byte data (0 to 65535) composed of random number comparison value upper and lower data.

  Such selection number acquisition processing can be performed by a prior determination for the above-described hit announcement effect (prior judgment based on each group of the numerical ranges a to e) or a pattern similar to the hit announcement effect. It is used in a process that requires a lottery of 2-byte data, such as a preview effect and a preview effect determination process performed for advance determination for a pattern preview effect.

  In the selection number obtaining process, a selection number indicating a predetermined random number value range is set, and the random number comparison value specified in the extraction table is sequentially subtracted based on the obtained random number value (random number data). Then, if the subtraction result is 0 or more, the number setting value of the selection number is incremented by 1, and the next random number comparison value is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is less than 0. As a result of repeating such processing, if the calculation result becomes less than 0, the calculated number setting value is set to the selection number to be output, and the processing is terminated. The selection number acquisition process uses various random numbers (win / fail random numbers, symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers) and various announcement judgment value tables (such as a hit announcement judgment value table and a hit symbol announcement judgment value table shown in FIG. 31). The range to which various random numbers belong is quantified.

  The above-mentioned random number comparison value can correspond to, for example, the upper limit value of the numerical ranges a to e in the above-described prior determination method based on the random number value grouping in the hit notice determination value table. Then, the 2-byte value related to the upper limit value is set each time according to the lottery determination target (hit, symbol, effect pattern, etc.), and the calculation result of the obtained random number value and the random number comparison value is 0 or more. The subsequent processing is executed depending on whether or not.

The selection numbers used when performing the selection number acquisition process in the preview effect determination process are EVENT data of the hit preview effect command, the hit symbol preview effect command, and the pattern advance effect command, and the value at the start of the process is S128. , S133 and S137 are 00H.
<Command request setting processing>

  Next, the above-described command request setting process (see S162 in FIG. 21) will be described. In this command request setting process, command data is created and command data is stored in order to store the input MODE data and EVENT data in the command buffer.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Creating command data

In the above-described command data creation, the RWM unused judgment bit (bit 7) of the input MODE data is checked in order to create the command data. If the result of the check is 0, the input EVENT data is set to the RWM lower address, the RWM head upper address (0F0H) is set to the RWM upper address, and the contents of the RWM address are set to the command EVENT data. Further, a MODE data identification bit (bit 7) is set in the input MODE data to make the MODE data. If the result of the check is 1, the input MODE data is set to command MODE data, and the input EVENT data is set to command EVENT data. In the above-described announcement effect determination process (see FIG. 21), since the MODE data is (D0, D1, D2H), the RWM unused determination bit is “1”, and the event data using the RWM is generated. Absent. The EVENT data is the selection number determined in the above-described selection number acquisition process.
2. Storing command data

  In storing the above-described command data, the double value of the logical product of the value of the command request writing position and the position correction bit data (00111111B = 63) is added to the address of the command request writing position. In the present embodiment, the ring buffer has a storage area of 128 bytes (64 commands). In the AND operation, a value to be offset from the head address of the ring buffer is calculated from the data at the command request write position by performing a double operation (left shift). Then, as described above, the offset value and the address of the command request write position (= the start address of the ring buffer−2) are added.

  Further, the command EVENT data acquired by creating the command data is stored at the calculated address +2, and the command MODE data acquired by creating the command data is stored at the calculated address +3. After the value of the command request writing position is obtained, the value of the command request writing position is incremented by 1 in order to update the storage position of the command data.

The command request setting processing includes the abnormality detection processing (S61), the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection processing (S62), and the handle state signal inspection processing (S64) in the above-described game progress interruption processing (see FIG. 13). ) Is called in the process of setting a command to be transmitted to the sub main board.
<Symbol storage number command request processing>

  Next, the aforementioned symbol storage number command request processing (S139 in FIG. 19) will be described. In this symbol storage number command requesting process, MODE (special symbol storage number) data (90H) and EVENT to request an effect command corresponding to the number of active balls of the special symbol display device 1 and the special symbol display device 2. The command request setting process is executed using the data as an argument. It should be noted that the result of the logical sum of the value obtained by exchanging the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the value of the special figure 2 operation pending ball number and the value of the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is defined as EEVVT data. That is, of the 1-byte data indicating the EVENT command, the upper 4 bits are the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 and the lower 4 bits are the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 1. The number of pending balls can be sent to the main.

In such a symbol storage number command request process, a process of storing a command (hold number command) for notifying the data of the hold number to the sub main board 301 in a transmission waiting buffer (ring buffer) is performed. Then, the commands stored in the transmission waiting buffer are sequentially transmitted from the transmission waiting buffer to the sub main board 301. The symbol storage number command request processing is performed when the number-of-reserved-number command cannot be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 normally upon winning a prize at the moment of power-off, or on the sub-board 104 side after power-off (particularly, the sub-sub-board 301). In order to display the number of holds during the return operation of (1), it is also called (S9 to S17) in the process (S9 to S17) at the time of power-off recovery in the control start process (see FIG. 12).
<Special symbol change start monitoring control process>

  Next, the above-mentioned special symbol change start monitoring control process (see S60 in FIG. 13) will be described. In this special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60), the change start of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) is monitored.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Monitoring the start of change of special symbol 2 (second special symbol)

In the monitoring of the start of the change of the special symbol 2 (the second special symbol), the start of the change of the special symbol 2 (the second special symbol) is monitored, so that the special symbol 2 game status (see FIG. 16B) The special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process is executed using the address of the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument. The details of the special symbol change start monitoring process will be described later.
2. Monitoring the start of change of special symbol 1 (first special symbol)

  In the above-described monitoring of the start of the change of the special symbol 1 (the first special symbol), the start of the change of the special symbol 1 (the first special symbol) is monitored, so that the special symbol 1 game status (see FIG. 16B) The special symbol change start monitoring process is executed using the address of the special figure 1 change start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) as an argument.

  FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of the special symbol change start monitoring control process. In the special symbol change start monitoring control process, first, the address of the special figure 2 game status is set (S181). Further, the address of the special figure 2 change start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S182), and the special symbol change start monitoring processing (S183) is executed. This special symbol change start monitoring process (S183) will be described later.

  Subsequently, the address of the special figure 1 game status is set (S184). Further, the address of the special figure 1 change start monitoring table (see FIG. 27) is set (S185), and the special symbol change start monitoring processing (S186) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the address of the status and the address of the fluctuation start monitoring table are set for the special figure 2 and the special figure 1, but these address sets are set for different registers. Done. Here, the status address is set in the HL register and the DE register. Any of the addresses set in these registers is used as a base address until the special symbol change start monitoring control process ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the second game is given priority (priority control) over the first game as described above, in this special symbol change start monitoring control process, the monitoring related to the special figure 2 (S181) To S183) are performed prior to the monitoring (S184 to S186) according to Tokujin Figure 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the start-up prize is generated and held and stored, the hold-up storage is digested (winning-out order). It is conceivable that the determination as to whether it is related to FIG. 2 is made first, and the change start monitoring control of the special symbol is performed according to the determination result.

The above-mentioned special figure 1 game status and special figure 2 game status are RWM work areas used also in the above-mentioned special symbol control processing. In this embodiment, the data of the special figure 1 game status is stored at the address F03AH, and the data of the special figure 2 game status is stored at the address F05EH. Further, as the contents of the special figure 1 game status and the special figure 2 game status, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), only the special figure 1 game status is shown, the special symbol change waiting state and the special symbol change start state are shown. , A special symbol change state, and a special symbol stop symbol display state.
<Special symbol change start monitoring process>

  Next, the above-described special symbol change start monitoring control process (see S183 and S186 in FIG. 23) will be described. In this special symbol change start monitoring processing, the operation state of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that preparation for starting the change of the special symbol is performed, updating of the number of special symbol operation reserved balls, hit determination, and determination of the symbol are performed. Then, a process corresponding to the result of the hit determination is performed.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Monitoring the operating status of special symbols

  In the monitoring of the operation state of the special symbol described above, when all of the following four conditions (first to fourth conditions) are satisfied, it is determined that preparation for starting the change of the special symbol is performed. First, the first condition is that the game is in the hit waiting state. As described above, when the value of the special power game status is 0, it is determined that the game is in the hit waiting state.

Subsequently, the second condition is that the state of the special symbol 1 is in the state of waiting for change, and when the value of the special figure 1 game status is 0, the state of the special symbol 1 is in the state of waiting for change. Judge. Further, the third condition is that the state of the special symbol 2 is in the state of waiting for change, and when the value of the special figure 2 game status is 0, the state of the special symbol 2 is in the state of waiting for change. to decide. The fourth condition is that the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol is not 0, and when the content of the input RWM base address + RWM offset 5 (5) is not 0, the operation-holding ball of the special symbol is not. It is determined that the number is not 0. Here, the “special symbol” means a special symbol (special symbol being processed) which is determined to start changing as described above, of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2.
2. Updating the number of special design operation pending balls

In the update of the number of special design operation reserve balls, the update (subtraction) of the special design operation reserve ball count and the special command activation reserve ball count effect command request are performed. And, among these, when the special command operation reservation ball number production command request, the special symbol display device 1 (first special symbol display unit 70) and the special symbol display device 2 (second special symbol display unit 71) are activated. In order to request an effect command corresponding to the number of reserved balls, a symbol storage number command request process is executed. The symbol storage number command requesting process includes a symbol storage number command requesting process (S12) in the above-described control start process (see FIGS. 11 and 12) and a symbol storage number command in the starting opening monitoring process (see FIG. 19). This is performed using the same control module as the request processing (S139).
3. Hit judgment

In the above-mentioned hit determination, after the transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation holding ball number, the hit determination is performed using the transferred random number, so that the special symbol hit determination process is executed using the random number as an argument. The details of the special symbol hit determination processing will be described later.
4. Design decision

In the above-described symbol determination, a symbol determination process is executed using a symbol random number as an argument in order to determine a stop symbol of the special symbol. The details of the symbol determination processing will be described later.
5. Processing corresponding to the result of hit judgment

  In the process corresponding to the above-described hit determination result, a special symbol hit determination result (win / fail result) is confirmed in order to perform a process corresponding to the hit determination result. If it is determined that the big hit, the setting of the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the game state setting after the end of the big hit, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the special The setting of the operation contents of the electric accessory, the setting of the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game, the setting of the demonstration effect time, the clearing of the RWM used for the hit determination and the symbol determination, and the setting of the special symbol state are performed.

If it is determined to be a small hit, the number of times to operate the special electric accessory is designated as one, the release pattern is set, and then the variation pattern selection state is set, the demonstration time is set, the hit judgment and the symbol are set. Clear the RWM used for the determination and set the state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the player has missed the pattern, setting of a variation pattern selection state, clearing of RWM used for hit determination and symbol determination, and setting of a special symbol state are performed.
(1) Confirmation of the result of special symbol hit judgment

In the confirmation of the special symbol hit determination result among the processes corresponding to the hit determination results, when the value of the special symbol determination flag is the special symbol big hit data (55H), the hit determination result is determined to be a big hit. Then, in the case of the special symbol small hit data (33H), it is determined as a small hit as a result of the hit determination, and otherwise, it is determined as a loss.
(2) Setting the operation contents of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device

In setting the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device described above, in order to set the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device, the content of the address calculated corresponding to the special symbol which is a big hit symbol Is stored in the probability variation determination flag indicating
(3) Game state setting after the end of the big hit

In the above-described game state setting after the end of the big hit, a time saving number determination process is executed to set the time saving game state after the big hit end. The details of the time saving number determination process will be described later.
(4) Big hit game state setting

In the above-mentioned setting of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the operation content of the special electric accessory, the number of times the special electric accessory is operated continuously and the operation content of the special electric accessory are set. Then, the special electric accessory setting process is executed. The details of the special electric auditors product setting process will be described later.
(5) Setting of variation pattern selection status

In the above-described setting of the variation pattern selection state, a variation pattern mode setting process is performed to set the content of the variation pattern selection state at the time of switching the limited frequency pattern table after the end of the big hit or the time saving game. Details of the variation pattern mode setting process will be described later.
(6) Setting demonstration time

In the above-described setting of the demonstration effect time, among the special symbols to be transmitted to the sub-main, a demo command (small hit start / end demo command, small hit start / end demo command) of EVENT data corresponding to the special symbol is selected. In order to perform selection and setting, and to save a time value used for setting a demonstration display time on the main board 102, a demonstration effect time setting process is executed. Details of the demonstration effect time setting process will be described later.
(7) Clear RWM used for hit determination and symbol determination

In the clearing of the RWM used for the hit determination and the symbol determination described above, the special symbol hit determination area used for the hit determination and the special symbol design determination area used for the symbol determination are cleared to 0, so the special symbol hit The RWM clear processing is executed using the address of the area and the number of clear bytes (4) as arguments. The details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.
(8) Setting special symbol status

  In the setting of the state of the special symbol described above, the input RWM base address (address of the special figure 1 (or 2) game status) + the content indicated by the RWM offset 0 (0) in order to change the state of the special symbol. Is controlled by “+1” while the special symbol is “changing”.

  FIG. 24 shows a flowchart of the special symbol change start monitoring process. In the special symbol change start monitoring process, first, the value of the special electric game status is loaded (S191). Further, the logical sum of the loaded value and the contents of the special figure 1 game status is calculated (S192), and the logical sum of the result of the logical sum and the contents of the special figure 2 game status is calculated (S193). If the result of the logical sum is not 0, the process returns (SS194: YES). If the result is 0 (S194: NO), the logical sum of the result of the logical sum and the content of the RWM base address + RWM offset 5 (5) is calculated. Take (S195).

  Here, although not shown, the RWM base address in S195 is “F03AH” in the status of the special figure 1 described above (or “F05EH” in the status of the special figure 2) (set in S181 and S184 in FIG. 23). . In the present embodiment, “RWM base address + RWM offset 5 (5)” is the address of the area in which the number of operation-reserved balls in Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) is stored.

  Here, the processing of S191 to S194 described above is processing for determining whether or not a game state in which a change can be started. That is, the value indicating the state of the big hit or the small hit is loaded in S191, and data indicating whether or not the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is changing is created in S192 and S193. Then, if the gaming state is, for example, during a change related to a special symbol, during a big hit, during a small hit, or during a demonstration effect related to a big hit, etc., the determination result of S194 becomes YES (S194: YES), and a new Since special fluctuation cannot be started, the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in these states, the determination result in S194 is NO (S194: NO), and the processing related to the special symbol change start monitoring from S195 is executed.

  Subsequently, the result of the logical sum calculated in S195 (the number of operation-reserved balls in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) is determined (S196), and if the result of the logical sum is 0 (if no reservation is made), the routine returns. Yes (S196: YES). If the result of the logical sum is not 0 (S196: NO), the content of the RWM base address + the RWM offset 5 (5) (the number of operation pending balls in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is decremented by one (S197). A symbol storage number command request process (S198), a special symbol hit determination process (S199), and a symbol determination process (S200) are sequentially executed. Among these, the symbol storage number command request processing (S198) is the same as the symbol storage number command request processing described above. The details of the special symbol hit determination process (S199) and the symbol determination process (S200) will be described later.

  In the above-described processing of S195 and S196, whether the reservation relating to the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) remains using the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number table (or the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number table) described later. No (whether or not there is a right to change).

  That is, as described above, this special symbol change start monitoring process is performed in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (see FIG. 23) which is the caller process. This is executed after the address of the fluctuation start monitoring table in FIG. 1 (or special figure 2) is set (S181, S182, S184, S185).

  More specifically, in S195 in the special symbol variation start monitoring process, the RWM base address is the status address set in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (see FIG. 23), which is the calling process. Then, when the offset 5 (5) is added to the RWM base address and an address five times after the base address is designated, the special pattern change start monitoring control process (see FIG. 23) sets the status address. The address where the number-of-reservations information according to the figure is stored is designated. Further, the logical sum with the contents of the designated address (reserved number data of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2) is obtained (S195). If there is a reservation, the result of the OR becomes $ 0 (S196: NO). The process proceeds to S197 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, when there is no hold related to the special figure, the determination result of S196 is YES (S196: YES), and the special symbol change start monitoring is ended.

  The above-described S197 is processing for reducing the data of the number of suspensions by one when the fluctuation can be started for the special map (S196: NO). In addition, the symbol storage number command request processing (S198) notifies the sub-main board 301 of the reduced number of reservations. Further, it is the same as the symbol storage number command request processing described above. The details of the special symbol hit determination process (S199) will be described later, but the hit determination is performed based on the acquired random numbers, and hit determination data as a determination result is stored. Further, in the symbol determination process (S200), the details will be described later, but based on the hit determination data, a hit symbol or a missing symbol is determined, and a determination regarding an effect is performed.

  Subsequent to the above-described symbol determination processing (S200), the value of the special symbol determination flag is loaded as hit determination data (S201), and the determination processing (S202, S203) is executed using the hit determination data. Then, if the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S202: YES), a special electric accessory setting process (S209) described later is executed. The details of the special electric auditors product setting process (S209) will be described later.

  In the above-described S202, when the hit determination data does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S202: NO), a process of determining whether the hit determination data matches the special big hit data (55H). Is executed (S203). If the hit determination data does not match the special symbol big hit data (55H) in S203 (S203: YES), the variation pattern mode setting process (S210) is executed. Details of the variation pattern mode setting process will be described later.

  If the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H) in S203 described above (S203: NO), the value of the group determination number is loaded as an offset (S204). Further, the address of the special symbol probability change determination table is set as the base address (S205), and the content of the base address + offset is loaded as 1-byte data (S206). Then, the 1-byte data is stored in the probability variation determination flag (S207), and the subsequent time saving number determination process (S208) and the like are executed. The details of the time saving number determination process will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the “group determination number” refers to the number of rounds, the presence or absence of a probability change, the opening pattern of the special winning opening, the time reduction game, among the special symbols corresponding to the big hit. It is a number for managing the same control of the number of times and the like, and is data determined in the symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25).

  The above-described processes from S204 to S207 include determining whether or not a probable change is made by using the group determination number or the address of the special symbol probability fluctuation determination table as an argument, and setting a flag according to the determination result (probability change setting process). Has become.

  Although the details of the above-described time saving number determination process (S208) will be described later, the number of time savings after the big hit is set. Subsequent to the time saving number determination process (S208), a special electric accessory setting process (S209), a fluctuation pattern mode setting process (S210), and a demonstration effect time setting process (S211) are executed. Among these, the special electric auditors product setting process (S209), which will be described later in detail, sets an opening pattern of each special winning opening (attacker). In the present embodiment, if the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) in S202 described above (S202: YES), the process moves to the special electric accessory setting process (S209). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process may shift to the above-described time saving number determination process (S208).

  The details of the above-described variation pattern mode setting process (S210) are set and stored in a table used for determining a variation pattern (variable pattern mode is set and stored). In the variation pattern mode setting process (S210), the variation pattern is not set, but the settings up to the variation pattern mode are performed. The change pattern table set in the change pattern mode setting process (S210) is used in the special symbol control process (S57) in the next game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13).

  In the above-described demonstration effect time setting process (S211), the demonstration effect at the time of stopping the effect symbol, the time data related to the hit demonstration effect, and the like are called and stored.

  Following the demonstration effect time setting process (S211), the address of the special symbol hit determination area is set as the RWM address (S212). Further, the number of clear bytes (4) is set (S213), and the RWM clear processing (S214) is executed. The processing from S212 to S214 clears the RWM area of the random number or the symbol random number used in the current special symbol change start monitoring process.

  The reason why the number of clear bytes is (4) in S213 is to clear only two bytes of the pass / fail random number and two bytes of the symbol random number. The reason why the data relating to the variation pattern is not set as the clearing target is that, at this stage, the variation pattern is not set in the variation pattern mode setting process (S210), and the setting up to the variation pattern mode is not performed. Because they have been

Subsequent to the processing from S212 to S214, the content of the RWM base address + the RWM offset 0 (0) is incremented by 1 (S215), and the special symbol change start monitoring processing is terminated and the routine returns.
<Special electric accessory setting process>

  Next, the above-described special electric accessory setting process (see S209 in FIG. 24) will be described. In the special electric accessory setting process, the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the operation content of the special electric accessory are set. More specifically, a 2-byte data selection process is performed using the value of the group determination number and the address of the special power operation count table as arguments. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired upper byte data is stored in the special winning opening time flag, and the obtained lower byte data is stored in the special opening number buffer.

The above-described “2-byte data selection process” is a process of acquiring data (lower-order data) at a specified address of the RWM and data (upper-order data) stored at the next address as 2-byte data. Here, the "2-byte data selection process" in the special electric accessory setting process will be described in more detail. To be more specific, the process is stored at the address moved by the group determination number (offset value) from the top address of the special power operation count table (not shown). The data stored in the upper address (F0H) and the previous lower address, and the data stored in the next address are referred to as the “large winning opening number” and “large winning opening”, respectively. This is a process of storing the "large winning opening number of times" and the "large winning opening time flag" in a predetermined RWM storage area by "2 byte data selection processing".
<Special symbol hit determination process>

  Next, the above-described special symbol hit determination process (see S199 in FIG. 24) will be described. In the special symbol hit determination processing, a hit determination is performed after the transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation holding ball.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation holding ball

In the transfer of the random number of the special symbol operation reserve ball described above, the random number stored in (the storage area of) the special symbol 1 operation reserve ball or the special symbol 2 operation reserve ball is hit, the stop symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is determined. In order to use the random number, the random number to be used next, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are transferred to the determination area in order to use the random number to be used next time. Perform random number transfer.
(1) Random number transfer to the judgment area

The address of the special symbol hit determination area is set as a random number transfer destination address. Then, the content indicated by the start address of the special figure 2 (or 1) change start monitoring table stored in S182 and S185 + table offset 0 (0) is set as the random number transfer source lower address, and the RWM start upper address (0F0H) is transferred by random number. Original upper address. The number of transfer bytes (6) is sequentially transferred from the obtained random number transfer source address to the random number transfer destination address. Here, the data of the top address of the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table and the special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table “address (lower order) of the number 1 of operation-reserved balls 1” is the first reservation, that is, This is data indicating the lower part of the address where the pass / fail random number, symbol random number, and variation pattern random number used are stored.
(2) Transfer of random numbers between special symbol operation pending balls

  The content indicated by the input data base address + table offset 0 (0) (the top address of the special figure 1 (2) number of active balls 1) is set as the random number transfer destination lower address, and the RWM head upper address (0F0H) is transferred as random number. The upper address is used. The obtained random number transfer destination address + 6 is set as the random number transfer source address, and the obtained random number transfer source address is sequentially transferred from the obtained random number transfer destination address to the random number transfer destination address by updating the random number transfer destination and the random number transfer source address by one for each of the transfer bytes (18). I do.

Further, in order to clear the special symbol operation reserved ball number 4 to 0, the RWM clear processing is executed using the address of the special symbol operation reserved ball number 4 and the number of clear bytes (6) as arguments. The details of the RWM clear processing will be described later. The address of the special design operation reserve ball number 4 is the address of the special design 1 operation reserve ball 4 in the case of the special design 1 and the address of the special design 2 operation reserve ball 4 in the case of the special design 2.
2. Hit judgment

After performing the big hit determination and the small hit determination, the result of the special symbol hit random number determination (hit determination data) is stored. If the big hit is determined to be a big hit, the small hit determination is not performed.
(1) Jackpot judgment

The special symbol mode flag value (a value indicating whether the current judgment is to be made to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is obtained, and a special symbol random number is determined in order to determine the special symbol random number. The pass / fail judgment processing is executed using the address of the judgment table (FIG. 8A) and the pass / fail random number as arguments. Then, as a result of the execution, when it is determined that the hit random number is included in the hit area, the hit determination result is determined to be the hit.
(2) Small hit judgment

After the big hit determination, it is determined whether the random number is included in the small hit area of the hit / non-high hit table shown in FIG. 8A, and if it is determined that the random number is included in the small hit area, the result of the hit determination is determined. Is determined to be a small hit.
(3) Storing the judgment result of random number per special symbol

The value corresponding to the determination result of the random number per special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination flag. The special symbol determination flag is "55H" for a big hit and "33H" for a small hit.
<Symbol determination processing>

  Next, the above-described symbol determination processing (see S199 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this symbol determination process, in order to determine a special symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol corresponding to the special symbol hit determination result and a character effect setting are performed.

Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described.
1. Check the result of special symbol hit judgment

When the value of the special symbol determination flag is the special symbol big hit data (55H), the result of the hit determination is determined to be a big hit, and when the value of the special symbol small hit data (33H) is, the result of the hit determination is determined to be a small hit. Otherwise, as a result of the hit determination, it is determined to be a loss.
2. Special design hit judgment result big hit

The big hit symbol is determined, the big hit symbol type is set, and the character effect is set.
(1) Decision of big hit design

In order to determine the big hit symbol, the input data base address (the top address of the special figure 1 (or 2) change start monitoring table) + the 2-byte address indicated by the table offset 1 (1) is used as the special figure 1 (the special figure 2). ) The address of the big hit symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29), the address of the acquired special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29) and the value of the special symbol design determination area (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 29). The byte data acquisition process is performed using the upper byte of the symbol random number as an argument. Details of the byte data acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table and the acquired 1-byte data (the address calculation value of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) pattern control table in FIG. 31) are added and calculated. The 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed by using the lower byte of the address (the address of the special symbol 1 big hit symbol control tables 1 to 4) and the value (symbol random number) of the special symbol symbol determination area as arguments. Details of the one-byte selection number acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) status) to which the obtained selection number is input + address of special figure 1 (special figure 2) number which is RWM offset 1 (1) As a symbol number.
(2) Setting the type of big hit symbol

In order to set the type of the big hit symbol, the value obtained by subtracting the number data (2) of the special symbol “symbol 3” from the selection number obtained in the determination of the big hit symbol and the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) are used as arguments. And executes a 1-byte selection number acquisition process. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is stored in the group determination number.
(3) Character effect setting

In order to set a character effect, a probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, the acquired special figure probability variation operation data is added to twice the obtained normal figure probability variation operation data. RWM base address (address of Toku-zu 1 (or Toku-zu 2) status) to which the value calculated by the formula of “(group determination number value × 4) +1” is added to the addition result, and the addition result is input. It is stored in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) character effect number which is + RWM offset 2 (2).
3. Special pattern hit judgment small hit

The small hit symbol is determined, the type of the small hit symbol is set, and the character effect is set.
(1) Decision of small hit design

In order to determine the small hit symbol, a byte data acquisition process is executed using the address of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30) and the upper byte of the value (symbol random number) of the special symbol symbol determination area as arguments. Details of the byte data acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired small hit symbol control table and the acquired 1-byte data (calculated values of the small hit symbol control tables 1 to 4 in FIGS. 30 and 31) are added, and the (small hit symbol control table 1) is added. 1-byte selection number acquisition processing is executed by using the address calculated from the address calculation value of (.about.4) and a predetermined upper address and the lower byte of the value of the special symbol design determination area as arguments. Details of the one-byte selection number acquisition processing will be described later. Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) status) to which the obtained selection number is input + address of special figure 1 (special figure 2) number which is RWM offset 1 (1) As a symbol number.
(2) Setting of small hit symbol type

  In order to set the type of the small hit symbol, a value obtained by subtracting the number data (2) of the special symbol “Symbol 3” from the selection number obtained in the determination of the small hit symbol and the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) 1 byte selection number acquisition processing is executed using Then, as a result of the execution, the acquired selection number is stored in the group determination number.

  Here, the special symbol “symbol 3” means a predetermined symbol among various types of special symbols. For example, taking the special figure 1 as an example, in the present embodiment, as the special figure 1 number, the special design "design 1" to the special design "design 18", the special design "design 27" to the special design "design 35", Thirty-three types of special symbols "symbol 44" to special symbols "symbol 49" are provided. This means that there are 33 types of special symbols according to the special figure 1.

  Further, although illustration is omitted, as the symbol numbers of the special symbol 1, “00H” to “11H” are assigned as the data corresponding to “Symbol 1” to the special symbol “Symbol 18”, and the special symbol “Symbol 27” is assigned. , "1AH" to "22H" are assigned as data corresponding to the special symbol "Symbol 35", and "2BH" is assigned as the data corresponding to the special symbol "Symbol 44" to the special symbol "Symbol 49". “30H” is assigned.

  Further, in this embodiment, the special symbol “design 3” to the special symbol “symbol 35” (excluding the special symbols “symbol 19” to “symbol 26”) are determined as the big hit symbols for the special symbol 1. . This means that the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 (see FIG. 28), the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 (see FIG. 29), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol This corresponds to the fact that the values calculated as a result of executing the 1-byte selection number acquisition process using Table 4 (see FIG. 29) are "00H" to "11H", "1AH" to "22H". It is shown.

  In the above-described symbol determination tables (see FIGS. 9A to 9D), the types of special symbols have been simplified from ten types of “0” to “9”. As described above, in this embodiment, about 50 kinds of special symbols are used. Of these approximately 50 types, the special design 1 is a special design "design 18" from the special design "design 1", the special design "design 27" from the special design "design 27", and the special design "design 44". 33 kinds of special symbols "symbol 49" are used.

  Such special symbols and data are also assigned to the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 number). Further, the content (symbol number) and data of the “special figure 1 number” according to the special figure 1 and the “special figure 2 number” according to the special figure 2 are partially different. Then, in the present embodiment, it is determined that “Symbol 19” to “Symbol 26” and “Symbol 36” to “Symbol 43” which are not selected in Tokusatsu 1 can be selected for Tokusatsu 2.

  This means that the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 (see FIG. 29), the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 (see FIG. 30), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol This is shown in Table 4 (see FIG. 30).

  Further, with respect to the small hit symbol, in the present embodiment, the special symbol "symbol 44" to the special symbol "symbol 49" are set as the small hit symbols in common to the special figures 1 and 2. This is shown in the small hit symbol table 1, the small hit symbol table 2, the small hit symbol table 3, and the small hit symbol table 4, which will be described later (see FIGS. 30 and 31).

  In the above description of the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C), the description has been made assuming that the small hits are assigned to the special symbols "4" and "6". The special design "design 44" and the special design "design 45" are shown in detail in the special design "4" in FIG. 9C, and the special design "design 46" and the special design "design 48" The invention according to the present embodiment can be understood by showing the special symbol “6” in FIG. 9C in detail.

Further, in the present embodiment, two special symbols are assigned to the special figure 1 and one special symbol is assigned to the special figure 2 in the present embodiment as described above (FIG. 9C). reference). This means that the random number comparison value 1 and the random number comparison value 2 are determined in the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table shown in FIG. 31, and only the random number comparison value 1 is shown in the special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table shown in FIG. Corresponds to the provisions. The special symbols indicating the loss are “symbol 1 (00H)” and “symbol 2 (01) H”.
(3) Character effect setting

In order to set a character effect, a probability variation function inspection process is executed, and as a result of the execution, the acquired special figure probability variation operation data is added to twice the obtained normal figure probability variation operation data. The value calculated by the following formula is added to the addition result, and the addition result is stored in the input RWM base address + RWM offset 2 (2) and the variation added symbol information.
(Value of group judgment number × 4) +1
4. The result of the special symbol hit judgment is off

Decision of a lost design and setting of character production are performed.
(1) Determining the missing design

In order to determine the missing symbol, the special symbol "Symbol 1" number data (0) and the input data base address (the top address of the special pattern 1 (special figure 2) fluctuation start monitoring table) + table offset 4 (4) From the stored data and the data of the next address, a 2-byte address (address of the special figure determination value table out of special figure 1 (special figure 2)) is calculated, and the calculated address and the value of the special symbol design determination area (design random number) ) Is used as an argument to execute the aforementioned selection number acquisition processing (see FIG. 22). Then, as a result of the execution, the RWM base address (address of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) status) to which the obtained selection number is input + address of special figure 1 (special figure 2) number which is RWM offset 1 (1) As a symbol number.
(2) Character effect setting

  In order to set the character effect, character effect 0 data (0) is stored in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) character effect number, which is the input RWM base address + RWM offset 2 (2).

  FIG. 25 shows a flowchart of the symbol determination processing. In this symbol determination process, first, the address of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30) is set (S221). Further, the value of the special symbol determination flag is loaded as the hit determination data (S222), and it is determined whether or not the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223). Then, if the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: YES), the processing of S23 to S241 described later is executed.

  In S223 described above, if the hit determination data does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: NO), the content of the data base address + table offset 1 (1) is loaded as the big hit symbol control table address. (S224). The data base address in S224 differs between the case where the symbol determination according to the special figure 1 is performed and the case where the symbol determination according to the special figure 2 is performed. By setting the contents obtained by adding the table offset 1 (1) to the base address as the table address, the big hit symbol control table (see FIGS. 28 and 29) according to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is set. Is done.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H) (S225), and if they match (S225: YES), the processing of S231 to S241 described later is executed. However, if the hit determination data does not match the special symbol big hit data (55H) in S225 described above (S225: NO), S226 to S230 (described later), which are processes in the case of loss, are executed. The processing in the case of a miss will be described below.

  In S226 described above, special symbol [symbol 1] number data (0) is set as a symbol selection number (S226). Further, the content of the data base address + table offset 4 (4) is loaded as a lost symbol determination value table address (S227), and the value of a special symbol design determination area (symbol random number) is loaded as random number data (S228). Then, a selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 22) is executed (S229), and the selection number is set as a stop symbol number (S230).

  S226 described above is a process of clearing data from the previous time. As will be described later, the out-of-position symbol determination value table used in S227 includes a out-of-position symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) and an out-of-position symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31). However, before the symbol determination process is started, it is determined which of the special figures 1 and 2 will be the symbol determination processing. Therefore, in S227 described above, a lost symbol determination value table related to the special symbol that has been determined as the target among the special drawings 1 and 2 is used. In addition, S228 described above is a process of calling the data of the symbol random number.

  Further, in the above-described S230, in the case of the special figure 2, the selection number 0 is set as the stop symbol number. That is, as described above, only one type of “first loss” is provided as a symbol notice command relating to the loss of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 16A). For this reason, in the case of an outlier related to Tokujin 2, only one type of value (here, 0) is set as the selection number in S230 described above.

  On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1, the selection number 0 or 1 is set as the stop symbol number. As described above, there are two types of design notice commands related to the loss of the special figure 1, “first loss” and “second loss” (see FIG. 16A). The random number comparison value 12 for outputting the selection number 11 as the random number comparison value when determining the EVENT data relating to the symbol announcement effect command in the process is “0026H”. On the other hand, in the symbol determination process, the random number comparison value for selecting “Symbol 2 (second loss)” using the special symbol 1 loss symbol determination value table is also “0026H” (see FIG. 31). That is, when the stop symbol related to the special figure 1 is “symbol 2 (second loss)”, 11 is always set as the selection number in the announcement effect determination process for the symbol announcement effect.

  Here, the symbol 1 which is the loss symbol specified by the selection number 0 represents the first loss symbol (also referred to as a standard loss symbol) corresponding to the "first loss" of the hit symbol announcement effect, and the symbol 2 Represents a second losing symbol corresponding to the "second losing" (also referred to as a non-standard losing symbol, a specific losing symbol, a reach-specific losing symbol, or the like).

  Subsequent to S230 described above, a process of storing the stopped symbol number in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) number calculated by the RWM base address + the RWM offset 1 (1) is executed (S242). Then, a series of processing for determining a symbol in the case of a loss ends, and the process returns.

  Subsequently, a series of processes executed in the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit will be described. In the above-mentioned S223, when the hit determination data matches the special symbol small hit data (33H) (S223: YES), or in S225, the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H). If it is determined (S225: YES), in S231, the value of the address +1 of the special symbol design determination area (the upper one byte data of the symbol random number) is loaded (S231), and the byte data acquisition process (S232) is executed. The details of the byte data acquisition process (S232) will be described later.

  Subsequently, the special figure 1 (special figure 2) big hit symbol control table (or small hit symbol control table) and the addition result (address calculation value) of 1-byte data are set as the drawing table address (S233), and the special symbol pattern determination is performed. The value of the address of the area + 0 (the lower 1-byte data of the symbol random number) is loaded (S234). Further, a 1-byte selection number acquisition process (S235) is executed, and the selection number (initial value) is set to the stop symbol number (S236). Then, the address of the special symbol group determination table (see FIG. 28) is set (S237), and the stop symbol number is set as comparison data (S238). The details of the 1-byte selection number acquisition process (S235) will be described later.

  In the processing from S231 to S236 described above, a stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined from symbol random numbers. Then, among these, in S231, the value of the upper 1 byte of the symbol random number is loaded. In S233, the table is switched using the 1-byte data related to the symbol random number stored in the byte data acquisition process in S232. As the table switching mode in the process of S233, for example, switching from the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (135CH) to the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 (1360H = 135CH + 04H) based on the address calculation value “04H” is performed. Can be illustrated. In the processing from S234 to S236, the lower one byte data of the symbol random number is called in S234, and the stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined from the one byte data in S235 and S236.

  Subsequently, the special symbol “symbol 3” number data (2) is subtracted from the comparison data (S239), and a 1-byte selection number acquisition process (S240) is executed. The details of the one-byte selection number acquisition processing (S235) will be described later. Further, the selection number is stored in the group determination number (S241), and the stopped symbol number is stored in the address of the special figure 1 (special figure 2) number calculated by RWM base address + RWM offset 1 (1) (S242). To return.

Here, the processing of S237 to S241 described above is processing of calculating a group determination number corresponding to the type of the big hit from the stop symbol (number) and the table. If the hit determination data does not match the special symbol small hit data (33H) in S223 described above (S223: NO), or in S225, the hit determination data matches the special symbol big hit data (55H). If not (S225: NO), after S230, the process of S242 is executed.
<Byte data acquisition processing>

  Next, the above-described byte data acquisition processing (see S232 in FIG. 25) will be described. In this byte data acquisition processing, the input offset is added to the input base address, and the result is set in the base address. Also, the contents of the set base address are stored as 1-byte data. The byte data acquisition process is also called in the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S55) in the above-described game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13).

In the byte data acquisition process (S232) at the time of the big hit (S225: YES) in the above-described symbol determination process (see FIG. 25), the upper one byte data (0 to 3) of the symbol random number (0 to 999) is input. The calculated address of the big hit symbol control tables 1 to 4 is added to the calculated base address (the top address of the big hit symbol control table in the special map 1 (special figure 2)) to obtain an address.
<1 byte selection number acquisition processing>

  Next, the above-described 1-byte selection number acquisition processing (see S235 in FIG. 25) will be described. In the one-byte selection number acquisition process, a selection number corresponding to the input comparison data is determined from the input drawing table. Further, the number setting value is obtained from the input drawing table, and non-each place indicated by the input drawing table is sequentially subtracted from the input comparison data. When the subtraction result is 0 or more, the number setting value is incremented by one, and when the subtraction result is less than 0, the calculated number setting value ends as a selection number to be output. While the selection number acquisition process is based on 2-byte data, this is a process for acquiring a selection number from 1-byte data.

FIG. 26 shows a flowchart of the 1-byte selection number acquisition process. In the one-byte selection number acquisition process, first, the contents of the extraction table address are loaded as the selection number (S251). Further, the drawing table address is incremented by 1 (S252), and the contents of the drawing table address are subtracted from the comparison data (S253). If the result of the subtraction in S253 is not less than 0 (S253: NO), the selection number is incremented by 1 (S254), and the above-described processing of S252 is executed again. If the result of the subtraction in S253 is less than 0 (S253: YES), the process returns. The 1-byte selection number acquisition process is also called in the normal symbol change start monitoring process (S55) in the above-described game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13).
<Time saving number judgment processing>

Next, the above-described number-of-time-saves-number determination process (see S208 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this time savings number determination process, in order to set the game state after the end of the big hit, the offset used for setting the game state is obtained, the number of times the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display device is activated, and the probability of the ordinary symbol display device Set the content of time-saving games such as activation of the fluctuation function.
<Variation pattern mode setting processing>

  Next, the above-described variation pattern mode setting process (see S210 in FIG. 24) will be described. In the variation pattern mode setting process, the content setting of the variation pattern selection state at the end of the big hit or after the small hit, the variation pattern selection state at the end of the time-saving game, and the variation pattern selection state at the time of switching the limited frequency pattern is performed. Do.

Note that the variation pattern mode setting process sets a mode relating to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined based on the mode set in the variation pattern mode setting process. 13) in the special symbol control process (S57).
<Demo production time setting process>

Next, the demonstration effect time setting process (see S211 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this demonstration effect time setting process, setting of demonstration event data to be transmitted to the sub main board 301 and storage of a time value used for setting of a demonstration display time on the main board 102 are performed.
<RWM clear processing>

Next, the aforementioned RWM clear processing (see S214 in FIG. 24) will be described. In this RWM clearing process, RWMs for the number of input clear bytes are sequentially cleared to 0 from the input RWM address.
<Variable time determination processing>

  Further, in the present embodiment, although not shown, a variation time determination process as described below is executed. This variation time determination process is performed by the sub-module of the special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13). More specifically, the special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) calls the above-described special symbol control general process (not shown), and the special symbol control general process calls the special symbol change start process (not shown). The special symbol change start process calls the change time determination process.

  In the above-described special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13), if the accessory is not operating, the status of the special figures 1 and 2 is confirmed, and the above-described special symbol control general-purpose process is called. Furthermore, in the special symbol control general-purpose process, the special symbol change start process, the special symbol change process, the special symbol change process are sub-modules for each status of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) which is the processing target at that time. One of the symbol stop symbol change processing is called.

  In the above-described special symbol variation start process, a variation pattern table to be used is determined according to the hit determination data (big hit (= 55H), small hit (= 33H), and missing symbol). At this time, if the hit determination data is outlier data, after setting a normal outlier table (standard outlier table), it is determined whether or not the current stop symbol is “Symbol 1 (second outlier symbol)”. Is determined. If the current stop symbol is “symbol 1”, the offset value is added to the referenced table address, and the reach selection frequency is high (almost 100%, or equivalent to the big hit variation pattern table). A process of switching to a second variation pattern table at the time of a loss (non-standard loss table) is executed.

Further, when the variation pattern is determined, the above-described variation time determination processing is performed, and variation time data is determined using the above-described 2-byte data selection processing based on the variation pattern random number and the set variation pattern table. .
<Various tables used on the main board for pre-reading effects>

Next, various processing tables used in the main board 102 for the above-described prefetching effect will be described.
<Starting port 1 monitoring table>

  FIG. 27 shows a starting port 1 monitoring table. The starting port 1 monitoring table is used in the above-described starting port monitoring control process (see FIG. 17). The address of the starting port 1 monitoring table is “1124H”, and the total area is “9”.

Further, the contents of the starting port 1 monitoring table include the starting port 1 switch bit data, the address (lower order) of the special figure 1 operation pending ball number, the address (lower order) of the special figure 1 random number transfer table, and the special figure 1 random number transfer table. Address (upper), RL0 hard latch random number value register 0 address (lower), special symbol 1 operation data, address (lower) of winning symbol preview determination value table 1, address (higher) of winning symbol preview determination value table 1, EVENT (winning symbol announcement effect 0). And, in the starting port 1 monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to these contents is defined.
<Starting port 2 monitoring table>

  Similarly, FIG. 27 shows a starting port 2 monitoring table. The starting port 2 monitoring table is used in the above-described starting port monitoring control process (see FIG. 17). The address of the starting port 2 monitoring table is “112DH”, and the total area is “9”.

Further, the contents of the starting port 2 monitoring table include the starting port 2 switch bit data, the address (lower order) of the special figure 2 operation pending ball number, the address (lower order) of the special figure 2 random number transfer table, and the special figure 2 random number transfer table. Address (upper), address of RL0 hard latch random number register 1 (lower), special symbol 2 operation data, address (lower) of hit symbol advance judgment value table 2, address of upper symbol notice judgment value table 2 (upper), EVENT (winning symbol announcement effect 0). Then, in the starting port 2 monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table>

  Similarly, FIG. 27 shows a special figure 1 change start monitoring table. This special figure 1 change start monitoring table is used in the above-described special symbol change start monitoring control processing (see FIG. 23). The address of the special figure 1 change start monitoring table is “129BDH”, and the total area is “6”.

Further, the contents of the special figure 1 change start monitoring table include the address (lower order) of the special figure 1 operation pending ball number 1, the address (lower order) of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol The address (upper) of the control table (see FIG. 28), the special symbol 1 operation data, the address (lower) of the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31), and the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) ) Is the address (upper). In the special figure 1 change start monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 fluctuation start monitoring table>

  Similarly, FIG. 27 shows a special figure 2 change start monitoring table. This special figure 2 change start monitoring table is used in the above-described special symbol change start monitoring control processing (see FIG. 23). The address of the special figure 2 change start monitoring table is “12A1H”, and the total area is “6”.

Further, the contents of the special figure 2 change start monitoring table include the address (lower order) of the special figure 2 operation holding ball number 1, the address (lower order) of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol. The address (upper) of the control table (see FIG. 29), the special symbol 2 operation data, the address (lower) of the special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31), and the special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table (see FIG. 31) ) Is the address (upper). Then, in this special figure 2 change start monitoring table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special symbol group judgment table>

FIG. 28 shows a special symbol group determination table. This special symbol group determination table is used in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). The address of the special figure 2 change start monitoring table is “12C5H”, and the total area is “19”. Further, the contents of the special symbol group determination table are 16R specific time-saving symbol 1 data, symbol number comparison value 1 to symbol number comparison value 18. Then, in the special symbol group determination table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Game state number setting table>

  Similarly, FIG. 28 shows a game state number setting table. The game state number setting table is used in the above-described time saving number determination process (not shown). The address of the gaming state number setting table is “1327H”, and the total area is “9”.

  Furthermore, the contents of the number-of-games setting table are as follows: easy winning state 0 times data, easy winning state 20 times data, easy winning state 40 times data, easy winning state 60 times data, easy winning state next time data, time saving 20 times data , Data of 40 time savings, 60 times of time savings, and data until the next time savings. Then, in the gaming state number setting table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.

Here, a game state number setting table for setting the number of time savings (time saving period) to any one of 20, 40, 60, and the next big hit according to the type of the generated big hit is shown. . Further, the gaming state number setting table can provide a specific gaming state (state of an easy winning period) in which only the above-mentioned easy winning state is performed without shortening the time. Any one of 0 times, 20 times, 40 times, 60 times, and the next big hit.
<Special figure 1 big hit symbol control table>

Similarly, FIG. 28 shows a special figure 1 big hit symbol control table. The special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is used for determining the big hit symbol according to the special figure 1 in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Further, the address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is a part of the contents of the aforementioned special figure 1 change start monitoring table (see FIG. 27). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table is “1330H”, and the total area is “4”. Furthermore, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table are the address calculation values of the special figure 1 big hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 28 and 29). In the special figure 1 big hit symbol control table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1>

Similarly, FIG. 28 shows a special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 is a part of the contents of the above-described special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 is “1334H”, and the total area is “7”. Further, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1 are special symbol “symbol 3” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 6. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to the respective contents described above is defined.
<Special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2>

In FIG. 29, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 is shown. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 is a part of the content of the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 is "133BH", and the total area is "4". Further, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2 are special symbol “symbol 8” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 3. In the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 2, as shown in FIG.
<Special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3>

  Similarly, FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 is a part of the contents of the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 is “133FH”, and the total area is “19”. Further, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3 are special symbol "symbol 10" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 18. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 3, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-mentioned contents is defined.

Although the data used as the random number comparison value is “00H”, if it is “00H”, it indicates that the area is not determined as the selection number in the above-described selection number acquisition processing.
<Special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4>

Similarly, FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4. The address calculation value of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 is a part of the contents of the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 28). The address of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 is “1352H”, and the total area is “10”. Further, the contents of the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4 are special symbol “symbol 27” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 9. Then, in the special figure 1 big hit symbol table 4, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol control table>

Similarly, FIG. 29 shows a special figure 2 big hit symbol control table. The special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is used for determining the big hit symbol according to the special figure 2 in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Further, the address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is a part of the contents of the above-described special figure 2 change start monitoring table (see FIG. 27). The address of this special figure 2 big hit symbol control table is “135CH”, and the total area is “4”. Further, the contents of the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table are the address calculation values of the special figure 2 big hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In the special figure 2 big hit symbol control table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1>

Similarly, FIG. 29 shows a special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 is a part of the contents of the above-described special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1 is “1360H”, and the total area is “3”. Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 1 are special symbol “symbol 3” number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to the respective contents described above is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2>

Similarly, FIG. 29 shows a special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 is a part of the contents of the above-described special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2 is “1363H”, and the total area is “8”. Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 2 are special symbol "symbol 4" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 7. Then, in the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 2, as shown in the figure, data relating to the respective contents described above is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3>

FIG. 30 shows a special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 is a part of the contents of the above-described special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3 is “136BH”, and the total area is “16”. Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 3 are special symbol "symbol 10" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 15. In the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 3, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4>

Similarly, FIG. 30 shows a special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4. The address calculation value of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4 is a part of the content of the above-mentioned special figure 2 big hit symbol control table (see FIG. 29). The address of the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4 is “137BH”, and the total area is “20”. Further, the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit symbol table 4 are special symbol “symbol 25” number data and random number comparison values 1 to 19. In the special figure 2 big hit symbol table 4, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Small hit symbol control table>

Similarly, FIG. 30 shows a small hit symbol control table. The small hit symbol control table is used for determining a small hit symbol in the above-described symbol determination process (see FIG. 25). The address of the small hit symbol control table is "138FH", and the total area is "4". Furthermore, the content of the small hit symbol control table is the address calculation value of the small hit symbol tables 1 to 4 (see FIGS. 30 and 31). Then, in the small hit symbol control table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined.
<Small hit symbol table 1>

Similarly, FIG. 30 shows the small hit symbol table 1. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 1 is a part of the content of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 1 is “1393H”, and the total area is “3”. Furthermore, the contents of the small hit symbol table 1 are special symbol “symbol 44” number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the small hit symbol table 1, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Small hit symbol table 2>

Similarly, FIG. 30 shows a small hit symbol table 2. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 2 is a part of the content of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 2 is “1396H”, and the total area is “3”. Further, the contents of the small hit symbol table 2 are special symbol “symbol 45” number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. Then, in the small hit symbol table 2, as shown in the figure, data relating to the respective contents described above is defined.
<Small hit symbol table 3>

FIG. 31 shows the small hit symbol table 3. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 3 is a part of the content of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 3 is “1399H”, and the total area is “4”. Further, the contents of the small hit symbol table 3 are special symbol "symbol 46" number data and random number comparison values 1 to 3. Then, in the small hit symbol table 3, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined as shown in the figure.
<Small hit symbol table 4>

Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a small hit symbol table 4. The address calculation value of the small hit symbol table 4 is a part of the content of the small hit symbol control table (see FIG. 30). The address of the small hit symbol table 4 is “139DH”, and the total area is “3”. Furthermore, the contents of the small hit symbol table 4 are special symbol “symbol 48” number data and random number comparison values 1 and 2. And, in the small hit symbol table 4, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-mentioned contents is defined.
<Special Figure 1 Lost Symbol Judgment Value Table>

Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table. The special figure 1 lost symbol determination value table is used for determining a lost symbol according to the special figure 1 in the symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Then, the address of this special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table is “13A0H”, and the total area is “4”. Further, the contents of the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table are lower (byte) and upper (byte) of the random number comparison values 1-2. Then, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-mentioned contents is defined in the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table.
<Special Figure 2 Lost Symbol Judgment Value Table>

Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table. The special figure 2 loss symbol determination value table is used for determining a loss symbol according to the special figure 2 in the above-described symbol determination processing (see FIG. 25). Then, the address of the special figure 2 deviation symbol determination value table is “13A4H”, and the total area is “2”. Further, the contents of the special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table are lower (byte) of the random number comparison value 1 and upper (byte) of the random number comparison value 1. As shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above-described contents is defined in the special figure 2 outlier symbol determination value table.
<Winning notice judgment value table>

Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a hit notice determination value table. The hit notice determination value table is used for determining a hit notice effect in the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The address of the hit notice determination value table is “13A6H”, and the total area is “10”. Further, the contents of the hit notice determination value table are lower (byte) and upper (byte) of the random number comparison values 1 to 5. Then, in the hit notice determination value table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.
<Winning symbol notice judgment value table>

  Similarly, FIG. 31 shows a hit symbol notice determination value table (hit symbol notice determination value table 1). The hit symbol notice determination value table is used for determining a hit symbol notice effect in the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The address of the hit symbol notice determination value table is “13B0H”, and the total area is “24”. Further, the contents of the hit symbol notice determination value table are lower (byte) and upper (byte) of the random number comparison values 1 to 12. Then, in the hit symbol notice determination value table, as shown in the figure, data relating to each of the above contents is defined.

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of types of information (here, 12) that can be selected by the above-described hit symbol notice determination value table is the number of types of information that can be selected by the aforementioned special figure 1 out-of-design symbol determination value table. (Here 2). Further, as described above, the symbol random numbers are "0 to 999", and the same number of random numbers (symbol random numbers) are used in the case of a hit symbol and in the case of a lost symbol (FIGS. 9A and 9A). b), (d)).
<Relationship between the number range at the time of determining the symbol related to the second loss and the number range at the time of the announcement effect determination regarding the second loss>

  Next, regarding the symbol determination process using the same symbol random number and the announcement effect determination process of the hit symbol announcement effect, the numerical value range at the time of the above-described symbol determination process relating to the second loss, and the time of the announcement effect determination regarding the second loss. Will be described. In the present embodiment, the number range of the symbol random number in the case where the second loss is determined by the symbol determination process is “962 to 999” as described above (FIGS. 9D and 31). (See "0026H" which is the random number comparison value 2 in the "special figure 1 loss symbol determination value table.") Further, in the announcement effect determination process (S134) for the symbol random number executed in the above-described start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19), the random number comparison determined in the hit symbol announcement determination value table (see FIG. 31). In the value 12, the symbol random number range is “0026H”, and symbol random numbers “962 to 999” are assigned. For the symbol random numbers belonging to this numerical range, the selection number “11H” is determined as EVENT data. It has become.

  There are two types of data selected in the special figure 1 deviation determination value table in the symbol determination processing. On the other hand, there are twelve types of data selected by the notice effect determination process of the hit symbol notice effect, which is the process of determining using the same symbol random number, and the number of types that can be selected is larger than that at the time of determining the missing symbol. Has become. The reason why the number of types that can be selected is larger than the out-of-designs is that the hit design notice judgment value table used in the notice effect judgment process for the type of the big hit in the case of a big hit and the effect type determined by the sub main board is used. Is subdivided.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the sum of the number range of the symbol random number relating to the second loss and the number range of the plurality of random number comparison values defined in the hit symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31). Or the sum of the symbol random number range related to the second miss and the symbol random number range related to the third to Nth misses, a hit symbol preview determination value table (FIG. 31). (See Reference). In addition, the number range of the symbol random number related to the second miss and the number range of the random number comparison value of 1 in the symbol notice determination value table match, and the other number range of the symbol random number related to the third miss, The set range of the other one random number comparison value of the symbol notice determination value table may be made to match.

Further, in the present embodiment, only two types of misalignment relating to the symbol notice are provided: the first misalignment and the second misalignment. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a third misalignment, a fourth misalignment, or the like is provided. The EVENT command in these symbol notice commands may be shared (matched) with the EVENT command in the symbol notice command of a low profit big hit (for example, 4R regular other than 4R regular 3).
<Processing on the sub-main board side based on a notice command from the main board>

  When various notice commands are transmitted to the sub main board 301 by the processing on the main board 102 side as described above, the sub main board 301 performs the following processing. In other words, when a new suspension occurs, the above-described various advance notice commands (hit announcement effect command, hit symbol announcement effect command, pattern announcement effect command) are added to the start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19) in the main board 102. When these commands are transmitted from the main board 102, the sub-main board 301 receives these various notice commands.

  The sub-main board 301 utilizes the received various advance notice commands (advance notice information) to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect (advance effect) such as a change in hold, or to determine an effect when the advance effect is implemented. The type and the like are determined by a production lottery at various timings, such as at the time of a prize or when the game is held. Further, in the sub main board 301, when a hit symbol announcement effect command in which the EVENT command is a predetermined value (here, 0BH corresponding to the second loss) is received, the effect of super reach or more as described above is performed. Perform the suggested type of pre-production. At this time, on the sub-main board 301, using a predetermined look-ahead effect pattern table in which only a look-ahead effect that indicates a super-reach or more effect is determined, regardless of the hit notice effect command and the pattern notice effect command, The look-ahead effect pattern to be executed is determined.

  In performing the above-described processing for determining the pre-reading effect on the sub-main board 301, when the sub-main board 301 receives the winning symbol announcement effect command, the analysis of the hit announcement effect command and the pattern announcement effect command is performed. Before, it is conceivable to analyze the winning symbol announcement effect command. When the EVENT data of the hit symbol announcement production command is not a predetermined value (here, 0BH), the hit announcement production command and the pattern announcement production command are analyzed, and the hit announcement production command and the pattern announcement production command are analyzed. The look-ahead effect lottery pattern table to be used is determined by referring to the table.

  However, if the EVENT data of the hit symbol announcement production command is a predetermined value (here, 0BH), the hit announcement production command or the pattern announcement production command is not analyzed, and these commands are not referred to. It is conceivable that a prefetch effect pattern is determined using a predetermined lookahead effect pattern table in which only a lookahead effect indicating a superreach or more effect is determined.

  By doing so, when a predetermined hit symbol announcement production command is received, regardless of whether the hit announcement command or the pattern announcement production command corresponds to a hit or a loss, In this case, a look-ahead effect that necessarily indicates a super-reach or higher effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the EVENT data of the hit symbol announcement effect command received by the sub main board 301 is a predetermined value related to the second loss (here, 0BH), Pre-reading effects are restricted. As the contents of this restriction, as described above, only the red suspension change is executed, and the suspension change that can give an impression that a big hit such as gold or rainbow is fixed is not executed. Can be exemplified. By providing such a restriction on the look-ahead effect, it is possible to easily balance the contents of the look-ahead effect with the contents of the jackpot. Note that the predetermined winning symbol announcement effect command (0BH) is a symbol random number range in which even if the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning random hit range is low. , It is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed by the low profit.

  Also, when the sub-main board 301 receives the command relating to the second miss, an effect display (suggesting) that suggests that as a pre-reading effect, it develops to a reach effect of the content provided exclusively for the second miss or the low profit jackpot. Effect display) can be performed up to the change that leads to the change (the change information). A plurality of types of the suggestion effect display and the reach effect of the content provided exclusively for the second miss may be provided as a selection pattern.

  Further, when the sub-main board 301 receives the command relating to the second miss, it may be determined to execute the pre-reading effect at the time of the start winning, and the determined pre-reading effect may always be executed. In this case, the pre-reading effect determined before that may be canceled. In addition, examples of the pre-reading effect include the above-mentioned reservation notice and continuous notice, and the change of the effect mode as described above can be executed as a pre-reading effect (advance notification effect). In addition, after the change of the hold for the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier is completed, if the hold related to the second miss is determined as the target of the pre-read, the second look-ahead effect for the second miss may be randomly selected. In this case, if there is a hit hold or the like, it is conceivable to give priority to prefetching for the hit hold.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main board 102 creates the various advance notice commands as described above and transmits them to the sub-main board 301. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The random number value is transmitted as it is as raw information (raw information), and the determination of the random number value range as in the above-described selection number acquisition process (see FIG. 22) and the notification effect determination process are performed on the sub main board 301. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-main board 301 receives a symbol advance notice command, and determines whether or not to perform a prefetch effect such as a hold change using the received symbol advance command, and determines the type of the prefetch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Then, for example, when the special symbol holding storage information occurs in the main board 102, the generated holding storage information is received as a command from the main board 102 by the sub main board 301, and the received information such as the obtained random number value is received. On the basis of the above, hit notice information, hit symbol notice information, pattern notice information, etc. may be created and stored. In this case, the sub-main board 301 may determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect and determine the type of the prefetching effect by using the hit notice information and the hit symbol notice information created and stored. Good.

  Then, as one invention, the main board 102 (or the main CPU 501) transmits the symbol notice information (symbol notice effect command) to the sub-main board 301 in the start-up opening monitoring process (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The sub-main board 301 (or the sub-main CPU 521) receives the design notice information and performs a pre-production effect (such as a pre-reading effect) using the received design notice information. The presence / absence of execution and the type of pre-production are determined, and the special symbol random number (eg, the symbol random number) is lost as the symbol notice information during the symbol determination process (see FIG. 25) in the main board 102 (or the main CPU 501). When a specific EVENT command determined in the announcement effect determination process is received when the random number value determines the It is possible to assume that.

Further, as another invention, in the effect control command, jackpot random number information pertaining to the acquired jackpot random number, special symbol random number information pertaining to the acquired special symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern random number information relating to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number, The sub-main board 301 (or the sub-main CPU 521) includes a special symbol generated when the game ball passes through the starting port (the starting port 1 or 2) and the special symbol holding storage information is generated on the main board 102. It receives the design holding information as an effect control command, executes processing for creating and storing predetermined design notice information based on the received special design holding information, and performs a preliminary effect using the stored design notice information ( Whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, etc., and the type of pre-stage effect are determined, and the symbol notice information is stored in a symbol notice determination value table (see FIG. 31). The symbol preview determination value table is created using the symbol preview determination value table 1 and the like, and the relationship between the special symbol random number and the symbol preview information (the random number value range of the symbol random number which can be obtained from the data value) And a symbol preview effect command associated with the random number comparison values 1 to 12), and a value of a range (corresponding to the second outlier in the symbol preview determination value table corresponding to the special symbol). The value in the range of 0026H determined by the random number comparison value 2 of the special figure 1 outlier symbol determination value table which employs FIG. 31) is the symbol determination value table used in the symbol determination process of the main control means. In the second outlier range (eg, the range of 0026H determined by the random number comparison value 12 in the hit symbol notice determination value table 1). Possible it is.
<Operation and effect of the invention according to the present embodiment>

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the above-described second loss symbol (reach-specific loss symbol) is provided as the type of the loss symbol. The symbol notice command relating to the second loss is the same as the symbol notice command relating to a predetermined type of jackpot (low profit jackpot) in the jackpot, and the EVENT command is shared (coincident with 0BH). . Then, in the sub-main board 301 that has received the shared EVENT command (0BH), based on the fact that the EVENT command is “0BH”, a prefetch notice effect indicating a reach effect of a predetermined rank or more is executed.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a process for determining a pre-reading effect pattern on the sub-main board 301 side without confirming the result of the success / failure lottery. Then, on the side of the sub main board 301, it is possible to simply make a determination for performing a look-ahead effect corresponding to an effect of super reach or more based on only the symbol notice command.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect can be determined based on more information by referring to the hit announcement effect command and the pattern announcement effect command. In such a case, the number of combinations of information that can be referred to can be increased compared to the case where the effect pattern of the prefetch effect is determined based only on the symbol notice command, and the prefetch effect can be diversified. Becomes

  Also, on the main board 102, it is possible to create information (prior-determination information) related to the preliminary determination common to the loss and the big hit by the symbol random number without referring to the information relating to the result of the winning lottery. .

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined value (0BH) is received as the EVENT command of the symbol advance notice command, the prefetch effect is restricted as described above. Therefore, it is possible to easily balance the content of the pre-reading effect and the content of the jackpot profit, and it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player when a jackpot with a small profit is acquired.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, but can be variously modified. For example, as described above, when a display using a plurality of liquid crystal displays or the like is employed as the effect display device 60, the effect symbol 190 is displayed on a predetermined display, and the other displays are displayed on the other displays. It is possible to display a 1-number-of-reserve display section 196, a 2nd-reserve-number display section 197, and the like. It is also possible to move the display target (character, effect design, hold number display section, etc.) between the screens of the plurality of displays.

  In addition, if the jackpot is determined to be a big hit, a big hit symbol, whether there is a certain change, whether there is a reduction in time, whether there is an extension extension of the ordinary electric accessory, various start demonstration start time, various end demonstration time, special electric accessory It is possible to determine the operation pattern and the like, and to refer to the result not individually but at different timings as needed in various control processes that require such information.

  Also, after the start of the special game, for example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, there is a certainty change, whether there is a shortened time, whether there is an extension extension of the ordinary electric accessory, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, etc. For pachinko machines that determine at least one of them (also known as "Tamaseki specifications"), for example, the time required for a big hit end demonstration depends on the game state, such as whether the change is probable or non-probable (normal). If a big hit is determined, a big hit end demonstration can be executed at the time according to the determined game state at the start of the big hit end demonstration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not during the big hit, the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is waiting for the change, and the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol to be changed is 0. Is a condition for starting the change, and the second game using the second start winning opening 63 is prioritized over the first game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the first game is prioritized, or a configuration in which, instead of prioritizing any one of the games, a start winning prize is generated and the reserved storage is performed in the order in which the reserved storage is performed Etc. can also be adopted. Among these, in the latter type in which the symbols change in the winning order, in addition to the above-described respective change starting conditions, for example, it is confirmed that the order of the pass / fail judgment and the digestion order (winning order) match. It can be determined that they are in agreement as one of the fluctuation start conditions.

  Further, as described above, in the type in which the symbol change of the first game and the second game is performed in the order of winning, when one game is won, the other game may not be determined. It is possible. Here, as a mode in which the other game is not determined, a mode in which the subsequent game is not determined until the jackpot game of the previously won game is over, or a later game start winning prize, for example, There may be a mode in which the validity determination is invalidated. That is, as in these various aspects, it is possible to appropriately set the condition for starting the change of the symbol according to the situation such as the content of the game when a plurality of starting ports are used.

  Further, it is possible to set an appropriate mode for the order of storing the game state after the end of the operation of the above-described condition device. For example, it is possible to set, in order, the probability fluctuation of the special symbol, the opening extension function, and the like, the opening pattern of the special electric accessory, the selection state of the fluctuation pattern (including the limited frequency pattern), and the times of the start demonstration and the end demonstration. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display request of the standby demonstration is made on the main board 102, and the customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. As an aspect, a timer is set at a predetermined timing, such as at the end of a big hit (at the end of the end demonstration) or at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol, and time counting is performed. It is conceivable that the command of the standby demonstration is transmitted when is becomes zero. Further, the command of the standby demonstration may be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 only when there is no special symbol holding storage. In this way, regarding the command transmission of the standby demo, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the command transmission based on the timing of the end of the big hit or the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol, or the number of the reserved balls. In addition, the transmission / reception of the customer waiting demo command is not performed from the main board 102. For example, a timer measurement is performed after the fluctuation stop command is received by the sub main board 301, and control for displaying the customer waiting demo is performed after a predetermined time elapses. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding the soft random number to the built-in random number is used as the pass / fail random number used in the jackpot determination, but the use condition of the pass / fail random number composed of the built-in random number and the soft random number is determined according to the game situation. It is also possible to determine. For example, if there is a winning opening prize and it is determined that the number of reserved balls at that time has not reached the maximum value, the random number composed of a built-in random number and a soft random number is used for the determination of the validity, and the suspension at that time is used. When the number of balls reaches the maximum value, for example, only soft random numbers (or only built-in random numbers) may be used as pass / fail random numbers. In the present embodiment, the storage of the obtained various random numbers is performed for the pass / fail random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variation pattern random numbers are not stored according to necessity.

  In addition, if the control processing relating to the start winning in the first game and the second game is taken as an example, the basic configuration of the control processing can be the same, although there is a difference in the control content based on another game. . For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the control program, the used storage areas of the RWM 503 are offset and made different, and the other program contents share many parts, so that the first game and the second game are shared. Control. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control modules may be separately created as completely different processes. In this case, the speed of the control process can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the priority order of the symbol change of the first game and the second game is determined, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is monitored in monitoring the operation state of the special symbol. Is checking whether or not is waiting for fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine of a type in which the special symbols of the first game and the second game can be simultaneously changed in parallel, the first game and the second game It is not necessary to confirm whether or not the symbols change in the two games are in a change standby state. In this case, it is desirable that the control processing modules are separately created so that the special symbols of the first game and the second game can be changed independently of each other.

Further, in the game area 52, parts such as the first start winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, the second big winning opening 92, the left operating opening 68a, and the right operating opening 68b are provided. The arrangement is determined according to the game characteristics employed in the pachinko gaming machine 10. In the present embodiment, the above-described arrangement (see FIG. 1) is employed. However, when the game characteristics are changed, for example, the second start winning opening 63 is set to the game area 52. It is also possible to arrange it on the right side and above the second big winning opening 92. Further, in this case, the second start winning opening 63 may be of a type having only one blade (single blade), or an opening / closing plate that moves horizontally back and forth without using a blade. It is possible to use a type provided with the door or a type with a falling door (attacker type). Further, it is also possible to provide only one large winning opening (second large winning opening 92 in the figure) without providing the first large winning opening 91.
<Second embodiment of the invention related to control processing of main board when power is turned off>

  Next, a description will be given of a second embodiment of the invention relating to the control processing of the main board when the power is turned off, with reference to the drawings. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a power cutoff signal is input to a non-maskable interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501 mounted on the main board 102, the CPU 501 finishes a predetermined control process and finally supplies a supply voltage. The control process is looped until the voltage falls below the operable voltage, and these points are common to the above-described embodiment. However, this embodiment includes a characteristic control process from the input of the power interruption signal to the non-maskable interrupt terminal of the CPU 501 to the loop process.

  That is, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment is a control start process (including a power-off process) shown in FIG. 11 (the diagram according to the first embodiment is diverted) and FIG. The game progress interruption processing and the power-off confirmation information setting processing shown in FIG. 13 which are diverted similarly to FIG. 11 are executed on the main board 102.

  In the control start processing shown in FIGS. 11 and 32, after the necessary settings (S1 to S4) are performed at the time of turning on the power, the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5) and the power failure state confirmation processing (S6 to S8) In response to the value of the power-off information flag and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, processing at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17), processing at the time of RWM initialization (S24 to S26), game The processing of the time setting for the progress interruption (S27), the circulation processing (S33 (S28 to S32)), the processing at the time of setting the power-off confirmation information (S301 to S307), and the like are executed.

Among these, the respective processes from S1 to S29 are almost the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, but the processes at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17) function as the restart preparation process, and thereafter, The second embodiment differs from the above-described embodiment in that the process proceeds to a process of setting a timer for interrupting a game progress (S27). After setting a predetermined value serving as the first recursive information in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29), it is determined whether or not power-off confirmation information is set by power-off confirmation information determination processing. (S30) When the setting has been made (S30: Yes), this embodiment is also different from the above-described embodiment in that the process shifts to a power-off process (S301 to S307) described later. Note that S31 (initial value random number update processing) and S32 (interrupt permission processing) in FIG. 32 correspond to S30 and S31 in FIG. 12 according to the above-described embodiment, respectively.
<<<< Circulation process >>>>

  Subsequently, a circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)) which is one of the main differences from the first embodiment will be described. In the circulation processing (S33 (S28 to S32)), interrupts are firstly prohibited in order to manage gaming machines (S28). Further, in order to prepare the interrupt processing time monitoring means to recur, a predetermined value serving as the first recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). The first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H. Further, it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set (S30). If the power-off confirmation information is set (S30: Yes), the process proceeds to power-off processing (S301 to S307) described later.

  If it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is not set (S30), it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is not set (S30: No). The initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Then, after permitting the interrupt (S32), the process returns to the interrupt disabling (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S32) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interruption permission (S28) is executed, the above-mentioned game progress interruption becomes possible, and the game progress interruption process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 4ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. .
<< Power off processing >>

  If it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is set (S30), if it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is set (S30: Yes), the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursion unit and sets the 22nd recursion information. Is performed (S301), the monitoring clock of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the clock is recursed. When the power supply is restarted by the compulsory setting of the second recursive information (S301), the control process is started with the monitoring clock recurring. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring time when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring time recurring in the control processing immediately after restarting the power supply. Has become.

  Subsequently, the address of the power-on information flag (power-off information flag) is set, the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power-on information is normally stored. Is performed (S302). If the information at the time of power-on is normally stored (S302: Yes), power-off normal data (here, 55H) is set (S304), and the RWM checksum at the time of power-off is set. This is calculated (S305), and checksum data is created. Then, access prohibition is set (S306), and the power-off loop process (S307) waits until the supply voltage falls below a predetermined value and the power is turned off.

If it is determined in step S302 that the information at the time of turning on the power is normally stored (S302: No), the power-off abnormal data is set. After (S303), the process proceeds to the above-described access prohibition process (S306).
<< Process for setting power-off confirmation information >>

  Next, a control process for setting the power-off confirmation information determined in S30 described above will be described. First, after the power is turned on, a control start process (see FIGS. 11 and 32) is started through a predetermined process, and further, a game progress interrupting time setting process (FIG. 32) executed during the control start process After that, a loop process (S33) is started. This loop processing corresponds to the circulation processing (S32) in FIG.

  When the start timing of the game progress interruption process comes after the start of the loop process, the game progress interruption process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Thereafter, if the power supply voltage drops during the game progress interruption process, the control process jumps to a predetermined address (here, address 0066H) with the non-maskable interruption process (NMI process). Then, the power-off confirmation information indicating that the NMI process has occurred is set, and the process of setting the power-off confirmation information for setting the power-off confirmation information returns to the return. Return to the processing of. Then, all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process in the cycle are completed, the process returns to the return, and returns to the control start process (here, the loop process (S33) in FIG. 32).

  Further, when the power supply voltage drops during the loop processing, the control processing shifts to a predetermined address (0066H) in the same manner as in the case described above, following the NMI processing. Then, the power-off confirmation information is set, the process exits from the return, and returns to the control start process (here, loop process (S33)).

  Then, it is determined whether the power-off confirmation information is set as described above (S30 in FIG. 32). Here, if the power-off confirmation information has not been set, the processing shifts to the loop processing start processing, and the circulation processing (S33 in FIG. 32) is continued. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation information is set, the power-off processing (corresponding to the above-described S301 to S307) is executed, and after the power-off processing ends, the power is turned off.

  In this embodiment, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the instruction being executed is completed in instruction units. For example, if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a control process (here, an LD (load) instruction) indicated by reference numeral 552 in FIG. 33, the control process 552 is continued during execution of the instruction, and execution of the LD instruction is executed. After the above is completed, the above-described power-off confirmation information is set. That is, the setting time of the power-off confirmation information is determined by the control processing for each instruction, and the power-off confirmation information is set after completing such an instruction.

  Here, the control processing including the above-described command includes control processing for each program module (in the present embodiment, for example, control start processing (see FIGS. 11 and 32), game progress interruption processing (see FIG. 13), initial processing). It is not limited to the value random number update processing (S31, S48), input processing (S45), and other processing), but also includes control processing such as setting and calculation of various data (S1 to S10, S41 to S44, and others). It is a concept. That is, taking the game progress interruption processing as an example, for example, when a non-maskable interruption occurs during the execution of a specific instruction constituting the control processing of the second recursive information set (S43), the execution of this specific instruction After the operation is completed, the power-off confirmation information is set. Then, the process of setting the power-off confirmation information for setting the power-off confirmation information exits from the return, and returns to the process at the time of the power-off during the game progress interruption process. Then, all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interrupt process of the cycle are completed, the process returns to the control, the process returns to the control start process (a loop process corresponding to S33 in FIG. 32), and the power-off process (the aforementioned process). (Corresponding to S301 to S307).

  Also, for example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction in the various random number update processing (S46), power-off confirmation information is set after the execution of this specific instruction. Then, the power-off confirmation information setting process returns to the return, the process returns to the process at the time of the power-off during the game progress interrupt process, and all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interrupt process of the cycle are completed and the control is completed. Returning to the start processing, the power-off processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described case.

  Such a control mode is the same when a non-maskable interrupt occurs in various aspects during the game. For example, if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific command from the start of the winning monitoring process (S51) to the end of the prize ball control process (S52), the execution of the specific command ends. After that, the power-off confirmation information is set. Then, the process returns to the winning monitoring process (S51) or the prize ball control process (S52), and all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process in the cycle are completed, the process returns to the return, and the control start process (FIG. 32) Then, the process returns to the loop process corresponding to S33, and the power-off process (corresponding to S301 to S307 described above) is executed.

  Further, other control processes in the game progress interruption process will be described. A special symbol control process (S57) defining a control process relating to a special symbol variation, and a special symbol variation start monitoring including a process of performing a jackpot lottery determination. Even when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction in the control processing (S60), the abnormality detection processing (S61) which defines the control processing related to error detection and error notification, or other control processing, the instruction at that time is After the execution of is completed, the power-off confirmation information is set, and after all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process of the cycle are completed, the power-off process is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the power-off required time, which is the time from when the power supply voltage drops to reach a predetermined value to when the power is turned off, is set by the power-off required time setting means. As the power-off required time setting means, for example, a device for controlling discharge such as a capacitor provided on the power supply substrate 251 can be used. The power-off required time is a power-off signal output voltage which is a value at which the power supply voltage starts to gradually decrease from a normal value (for example, 30 V) and the power-supply board 251 outputs a power-off signal, as indicated by a symbol M in FIG. (For example, 18 V), which is the time required to reach 5 V, which is the supply voltage input to the CPU 501 of the main board 102. In the present embodiment, the power-off required time X is a time A required to complete the control start processing, a time B required to complete the game progress interruption processing, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set to be larger than the sum of the time D required to complete the power-off processing, and to satisfy the relationship of A + B + C + D <X.

The power-off required time is set to end before the timing at which the sub-board 104 that receives various control commands depending on the main board 102 starts the power-off processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned off, not only the main board 102 but also the sub-board 104, which is the sub-control means, executes the power-off processing in preparation for the power-off according to the content of the control processing. However, the start timing of the power-off processing performed by the sub-board 104 is after the power-off required time has elapsed on the main board 102 and the power-off processing has been completed. In addition, similarly to the sub-board 104, for example, the pay-out control board 103, the power-off processing may be started after the power-off required time has elapsed on the main board 102. Further, the relationship between the power-off required time of the main board 102 and the start time of the power-off process of the sub-control means may be applied only to the payout control board 103. Further, when a sub-control means having a control function is provided in addition to the sub-board 104 and the payout control board 103, the present invention can be applied to the sub-control means.
<Operation and effect of the invention according to the second embodiment of the control processing of the main board when the power is turned off>

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the above-mentioned power-off confirmation information is set and stored, and thereafter, the control process is continued until the game progress interruption process of the cycle at that time ends, After the progress interruption processing is completed, the power-off processing (S301 to S307) is executed, and the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the power can be turned off after the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle is completed, and the transmission and reception of the command set during the game progress interrupt processing are forcibly interrupted. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem caused by terminating the game progress interruption processing halfway.

  More specifically, for example, taking the input signal for payout control from the main board to the payout control board as an example, the start of the prize monitoring process (S51 in FIG. 13) to the end of the prize ball control process (S52). In the meantime, even if a voltage drop occurs during the control process for transmitting the main control MODE command, which causes a power loss, the power-off confirmation information is set after the control process for each instruction at that time is completed. Is performed (S111), and thereafter, the process returns to the game progress interruption process, and the command transmission process is continued. Then, the control processing for both the main control EVENT command and the main control MODE command is completed, and after all necessary control processing during the game progress interruption processing of the cycle is completed, the power cutoff processing is executed (S301 to S301). S307). Therefore, in the game progress interruption processing unit, the control processing is terminated in an incomplete state and the power is not turned off, so that it is possible to easily restart the control processing when the power is restored. Furthermore, since the power supply is prevented from being interrupted during the game progress interrupt process, it is not necessary to save the use register and save the interrupt enabled or disabled state during the game progress interrupt process. .

  In addition, for example, a special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) that defines a control process relating to the variation of the special symbol, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) including a process of performing a jackpot lottery determination, error detection, In the abnormality detection processing (S61) that defines the control processing related to the error notification or other control processing, control processing of command transmission and the like are completed after setting of power-off confirmation information, and comprehensive processing including these control processings is performed. After the game progress interruption process of the cycle, which is a typical control process, is completed, the power-off process is executed. Therefore, in the next game progress interruption processing, for example, control processing such as retransmission of the latter half (lower part) of the command that should have been transmitted can be omitted, stabilizing information communication and reducing the load on the control processing. Can be realized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the power supply voltage decreases and reaches a predetermined value, a power-off required time setting means for setting a time until the power-off is provided. The power-off required time X by the time setting means is a time A required to complete the control start processing, a time B required to complete the game progress interruption processing, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set to be longer than the total time D required to complete the power-off processing. Therefore, it is possible to end the control process in the case of power failure without aborting the process in the middle, and it is also possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble at the time of power failure.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the start timing of the power-off processing of the sub-control means (the sub-board 104, the payout control board 103, etc.) is determined by the control start processing, the game progress interruption processing, and the power-off confirmation information in the main control means. The setting and the time required for the power-off processing are taken into consideration, and as a result, the cooperation of the main control means and the sub-control means relating to the power-off processing can be strengthened, and the main control means and the sub-control means can be connected to each other. It is possible to more completely transmit the control command.

In addition, by devising the control process when the power is turned off, it is possible to restrict the control state when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off and the power is restored to a certain level.
<Third embodiment of the invention relating to control processing of main board when power is turned off>

  Next, a description will be given of a third embodiment relating to the control processing of the main board when the power is turned off. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the second embodiment relating to the above-described control processing when the power is turned off, the power-off confirmation information is set when the power supply voltage drops and a power-off signal is input to an NMI terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501. However, in the third embodiment, even if the power interruption signal is input, the power interruption confirmation information is not set unless the input mode of the power interruption signal satisfies a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined condition include the number of times the power interruption signal is input, the input period, and the like.

  For example, the power interruption signal is divided into a first power interruption signal and a second power interruption signal, and the first power interruption signal is the same as the power interruption signal of the second embodiment. Then, the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501. On the other hand, the second power interruption signal is output to the CPU 501 along with the output of the first power interruption signal. When the first power interruption signal is input to the CPU 501, the second power interruption signal is output to the CPU 501. Is input to another input terminal. When the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal, the CPU 501 completes the instruction executed at that time in the same manner as in the second embodiment, and then executes a predetermined address (here, 0066H) defined on the control program. Address) is jumped to the control processing. Further, the CPU 501 monitors the number of inputs of the second power-off signal, and executes the setting of the power-off confirmation information if the number of inputs reaches, for example, five.

  Even when the second power interruption signal is not input five or more times, the CPU 501 shifts the control processing to the above-described predetermined address (0066H) with the input of the first power interruption signal to the NMI terminal. . However, although the transition to the predetermined address is performed, no other control processing for preparing for the power-off is performed, and the setting of the power-off confirmation information is not executed. After the transition to the predetermined address (0066H) is performed once, the process returns to the control process before the transition, for example, during the game progress interruption process. That is, even if the input mode of the second power-off signal does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the control process temporarily shifts to a predetermined address (0066H), but without performing any control process for setting power-off confirmation information or the like. Then, the process returns to the control process before the transition.

  The number of times the second power interruption signal is input is added each time the game progress interruption process is repeated. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the input of the second power interruption signal is repeated over five game progress interruption processes.

  According to the third embodiment, when the power supply voltage is not lowered, even if a signal is input to the NMI terminal due to the influence of noise or the like, the power-off confirmation information is generated only due to the signal input. Setting can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the power cut-off process from being executed by mistake in a situation where the power should not be cut off and the power should not be cut off. Further, as in the present embodiment, after the control processing is shifted to a predetermined address, the processing is immediately exited without setting the power-off confirmation information, so that the first power-off signal accompanies the input. It is possible to set the power-off confirmation information more reliably while using the non-maskable interrupt function.

  That is, a CPU used for various control boards of a game machine generally has a function of an NMI which is a hardware interrupt, and the CPU has an input terminal for the NMI function and an electronic circuit portion (logic). Circuit is included). However, if a control process that ignores a signal input to the NMI terminal is performed, a design change for eliminating the function of the NMI is required in a program and a circuit design. If the NMI terminal and the electronic circuit part for the NMI are not used while leaving them, for example, if a measure such as grounding is taken, the unused (or unused) terminal or function is not used. May be left behind and used for fraudulent activities. On the other hand, a configuration for the NMI function is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the control process is shifted to a predetermined address (0066H) when the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal as in the present embodiment. It is possible to take measures against noise and the like while minimizing the design change of the main board 102 while using the data without deleting it.

In the present embodiment, five inputs are defined as the predetermined condition to be satisfied by the input mode of the second power interruption signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. May be set. Further, the number of times is not limited to a predetermined number, but may be, for example, an input over a predetermined period. Furthermore, in order to generate the second power interruption signal, the signal path of the first power interruption signal is branched and directly input to the CPU 501, or the branch signal of the first power interruption signal is input to the switching circuit. And so on. It is desirable that the first power interruption signal and the second power interruption signal are input in synchronization with the CPU 501, but the second power interruption signal is delayed as long as the operation and effect of the present embodiment can be achieved. A configuration may be adopted. Further, the number of times of inputting the second power interruption signal is assumed to be added each time the game progress interruption process is repeated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of times during one game progress interruption process. The number of times satisfying the predetermined condition may be counted based on the countable items.
<Application to enclosed gaming machines>

  In addition, the present invention also provides a game ball as a game medium acquired by a player, as described above, by directly paying the game ball to the player so that the player can touch the prize ball. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to, for example, a closed circulation type pachinko game machine. The following can be exemplified as the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine. The same parts as those of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the above-described embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

  That is, the enclosed revolving pachinko gaming machine has a game ball as a game medium sealed therein, and the player operates the firing handle 20 to drive the firing motor of the firing device to set the sealed ball to one. The game can be played by hitting the game area 50 on the front face of the game board 50 one by one. As the configuration of the gaming area 52, a configuration similar to that of the pachinko gaming machine of the type for delivering a game ball to a player like the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above can be adopted. Further, since there is no need to hand over the game balls to the player, the upper ball plate 18 and the lower ball plate 19 for temporarily storing the game balls may not be provided.

  The game balls that have won the game area 52 and the game balls that have not won the game are guided to a ball collection gutter formed on the set base 31 and are pumped by a pumping device (not shown). The lifting device incorporates a lifting screw that is rotated by a lifting motor, and a pachinko ball (game ball) is lifted by rotation of the lifting screw. A polishing member is provided on the back of the lifting device for polishing the pachinko ball by contacting the pachinko ball during lifting, and the surface of the pachinko ball is polished while being lifted.

  At the ball entrance side (lower side) and the ball discharge port side (upper side) of the lifting device, detection switches for game balls are provided, and the detection switches detect pachinko balls to be lifted. A ball launching device is provided near the ball discharge port of the lifting device, and the game balls detected by the (upper side) detection switch after the lifting are supplied to the ball launching device by the ball feeding device. . The ball feeder has a function of sending the next game ball to the hit ball firing position each time the player operates the firing handle 20 and hits one game ball. Further, a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch is provided in the middle of the game ball circulation path, and detects whether a predetermined number (for example, 50) of pachinko balls are in the circulation path.

  A card unit (CU), which is an example of a gaming device, is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with a pachinko gaming machine at a predetermined lateral position of the pachinko gaming machine. This is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above. The card unit is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or issued to a member player who has registered as a member at the playground. A pachinko gaming machine that accepts a membership card, which is a game recording medium, and uses a game value (for example, a card balance, the number of balls held, or the number of stored balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the recorded information on the card. Has a function to allow the player to play the game by firing the enclosed ball in. Note that the visitor card and the membership card are constituted by IC cards.

  In this pachinko gaming machine, the current number of balls held is managed by calculating the variation in the number of gaming balls on the pachinko gaming machine on the card unit side. The pachinko gaming machine also calculates and stores the current number of gaming balls, but when the number of gaming balls on the pachinko gaming machine becomes zero, the pachinko gaming machine quickly launches a hit ball. This is a secondary one used only for performing control to stop. In this way, the card unit has a main management function regarding the number of gaming balls on the pachinko gaming machine side, thereby suppressing the cost of the pachinko gaming machine side, thereby enabling the running cost of a game room to introduce the enclosed type gaming machine. Can be reduced.

  When the power is turned on in a state where the pachinko gaming machine and the CU are electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the game arcade, the payout control board on the pachinko gaming machine side transmits the main chip ID from the main board. Then, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control board itself is transmitted to the card unit side. The card unit stores the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the card unit side to the pachinko gaming machine side, and the pachinko gaming machine side has transmitted the data. The connection time is stored.

  When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit.

  The card unit collates the transmitted data with the already stored data to determine whether or not the same pachinko gaming machine as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted every time the power is turned on, and new connection time data at which communication between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine is started is transmitted from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine and the new connection time data is transmitted. The connection time data is stored on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  The card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to transmit the main chip ID and the like to the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine transmits the main chip ID and the like to the card unit. Further, the card unit requests authentication of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit of the acceptance of the authentication request from the card unit. Also, the transmission of the recovery information from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine is requested, and the recovery information held by the pachinko gaming machine is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit. Subsequently, the card unit notifies the pachinko gaming machine that the pachinko gaming machine is connected, and the pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit that the connection state is established. Also, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to clear the recovery information and backup the connection ID (communication start time), and the pachinko gaming machine sends the recovery information clear, connection ID (communication) to the card unit. The end of the backup at (start time) is notified.

  Further, various (game operations) are instructed from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine, and transmission of gaming machine information (addition / subtraction data and the like) is requested. The card unit uses this command to periodically check the status of the gaming table. The pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit of the execution result of the game operation instruction and game machine information (addition / subtraction data and the like). A command requesting connection of a communication connection is transmitted from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine.

  Also, when it is detected that the gaming ball has run out while playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine, the payout control board automatically stops driving of the hit ball firing motor and hits the ball into the game area. The game is controlled so that the game cannot be entered. It should be noted that the hit display is only stopped, and if the variable display device is already performing variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued. If the number of balls retained in the first start winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 is stored at the stage when the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued. .

  Although the main management of the number of gaming balls is performed by the card unit, the pachinko gaming machine only performs the game prohibition control (the firing stop control) associated with the number of gaming balls becoming 0 in the pachinko gaming machine. It determines that the number of game balls has become 0, and performs game prohibition control (fire stop control). Thereafter, the final ball-related information is transmitted to the card unit as an operation response, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the card unit side. The reason for such control is that it is necessary to perform hit ball firing stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes 0 on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  For example, on the card unit side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the pachinko gaming machine = 0 becomes zero. Waiting for the reception, the card unit calculates the final number of gaming balls, and when it becomes 0, transmits a command of an operation instruction with a prohibition request to prohibit the game to the pachinko gaming machine side, If the pachinko machine controls the launching of the ball for the first time after receiving it, the pachinko ball may be fired during the transmission and reception of the response and command, and a new number of subtracted balls may be generated during that time. On the pachinko gaming machine side, a new subtraction ball count is generated even though the game ball count is already “0”, and the game ball count eventually becomes negative. Inconvenience say occurs. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the hit ball launch stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  As described above, the game control represented by the hit ball firing stop control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the card unit in order to perform based on the number of game balls stored by the pachinko game machine itself. As compared with the case where such a game control is performed, it is possible to perform the game control according to the change in the number of the game balls in real time.

  Here, an example is shown in which the payout control board performs the hit ball firing stop control. However, the main board may perform the hit ball firing stop control. In this case, for example, the payout control board transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main board when the number of game balls is determined to be zero. The main board receives this signal and prohibits driving of the firing motor.

  Such a game prohibition process by the card unit is also executed when the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 is opened or when a player returns the various cards. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine is capable of responding to the prohibition rejection, and cannot respond to the instruction of the card unit due to some kind of abnormality or the like, for example, in a case where the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 cannot be opened. This rejection response is transmitted to the card unit. The game prohibition includes not only prohibition of driving of the firing motor, but also other game items such as ball lending.

  Further, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, ball lending for an input amount (for example, 10,000 yen) is collectively performed without lending a ball for a predetermined amount (for example, 500 yen or 1000 yen). It is also possible. Since it is not necessary to deliver a game ball to a player, adaptation to such a ball rental form can be easily performed.

  In the invention of the present application, it is possible to comprehensively grasp as a pachinko gaming machine including a form in which a card unit is attached.

10 pachinko gaming machines, 50 gaming boards, 52 gaming areas, 53 main control display devices,
62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening, 70 first special symbol display,
71 second special symbol display section, 91 first large winning opening, 92 second large winning opening,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first correct / incorrect judgment means,
117 second success / failure determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub main board,
302 Sub-sub board, 501 Main board CPU.

Claims (2)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit communicably connected to the main control unit and performing a control process according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Main control display means controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
A control start process for executing a control start process with power-on;
A game progress interruption process for executing a game progress interruption process for a game progress at a predetermined cycle, and
A predetermined random number is obtained based on that the game medium fired in the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined start area,
The random number includes at least a jackpot random number for jackpot lottery determination, and a special symbol random number for determination of a special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
Based on the jackpot random number, perform a jackpot lottery determination to determine whether it is a jackpot,
Based on the special symbol random number, perform a special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol,
Based on the results of the jackpot lottery determination and the special symbol lottery determination, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main control display means, and if the result of the jackpot lottery determination is a big hit, the special After the symbol stop display, perform a special game that is more advantageous to the player than usual,
Even if the game medium passes through the start area, if the start condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not satisfied, the special symbol holding storage information including at least the jackpot random number and the special symbol random number within a predetermined number It is possible to memorize,
In the game progress interruption process, at least
A start area monitoring process for monitoring the passage of game media in the start area,
A symbol determination process for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed,
In the starting area monitoring process,
When the game medium passes through the starting area and the special symbol hold storage information occurs, executes processing for creating and storing predetermined notice information based on the generated special symbol hold storage information,
In the symbol determination process,
Performing the process for the special symbol lottery determination using a different predetermined symbol determination table according to the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
If the result of the jackpot lottery determination is incorrect,
Using a predetermined outlier symbol determination value table as the symbol determination table,
When the obtained special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined first loss range, the special symbol is determined so that the special symbol becomes a predetermined first loss symbol,
When the obtained special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined second loss range, the special symbol is determined so that the special symbol becomes a predetermined second loss symbol,
The transmission information is configured by a combination of a numerical value that is predetermined first component information and a numerical value that is predetermined second component information,
The transmission information includes the notice information,
The notice information includes jackpot notice information indicating notice information related to the jackpot random number, and design notice information indicating notice information related to the special symbol random number,
The symbol notice information is created using a symbol notice determination value table,
In the symbol notice determination value table, the relationship between the special symbol random number and the symbol notice information is determined,
The second component element information in the symbol notice information is generated using the symbol notice determination value table, and a value range of the special symbol random number for selecting a part of the generated second component element information Corresponds to the value range belonging to the second loss range of the loss symbol determination value table used in the symbol determination processing,
The main control means, in the starting area monitoring processing, executes a notice effect determination processing for transmitting the symbol notice information to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means,
Receiving the symbol advance notice information, the presence or absence of the execution of the preliminary effect using the received symbol advance notice information, determine the type of the advance effect,
When the special symbol random number is a random number value for determining the second loss at the time of the symbol determination process in the main control means , the specific second determined in the preview effect determination process as the symbol preview information. The pachinko gaming machine, wherein the pre-production is always performed when component information is received. Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control unit communicably connected to the main control unit and performing a control process according to transmission information transmitted from the main control unit;
Main control display means controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes:
A control start process for executing a control start process with power-on;
A game progress interruption process for executing a game progress interruption process for a game progress at a predetermined cycle, and
A predetermined random number is obtained based on that the game medium fired in the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined start area,
The random number includes at least a jackpot random number for jackpot lottery determination, and a special symbol random number for determination of a special symbol indicating the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
Based on the jackpot random number, perform a jackpot lottery determination to determine whether it is a jackpot,
Based on the special symbol random number, perform a special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol,
Based on the results of the jackpot lottery determination and the special symbol lottery determination, the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the main control display means, and if the result of the jackpot lottery determination is a big hit, the special After the symbol stop display, perform a special game that is more advantageous to the player than usual,
Even if the game medium passes through the start area, if the start condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not satisfied, the special symbol holding storage information including at least the jackpot random number and the special symbol random number within a predetermined number It is possible to memorize,
In the game progress interruption process, at least
A start area monitoring process for monitoring the passage of game media in the start area,
A symbol determination process for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed,
In the starting area monitoring process,
When the game medium passes through the starting area and the special symbol hold storage information occurs, executes processing for creating and storing predetermined notice information based on the generated special symbol hold storage information,
In the symbol determination process,
Performing the process for the special symbol lottery determination using a different predetermined symbol determination table according to the result of the jackpot lottery determination,
If the result of the jackpot lottery determination is incorrect,
Using a predetermined outlier symbol determination value table as the symbol determination table,
When the obtained special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined first loss range, the special symbol is determined so that the special symbol becomes a predetermined first loss symbol,
When the obtained special symbol random number is a value belonging to a predetermined second loss range, the special symbol is determined so that the special symbol becomes a predetermined second loss symbol,
The transmission information is configured by a combination of a numerical value that is predetermined first component information and a numerical value that is predetermined second component information,
The transmission information includes the notice information,
The notice information includes jackpot notice information indicating notice information related to the jackpot random number, and design notice information indicating notice information related to the special symbol random number,
The symbol notice information is created using a symbol notice determination value table,
In the symbol notice determination value table, the relationship between the special symbol random number and the symbol notice information is determined,
The second component element information in the symbol notice information is generated using the symbol notice determination value table, and a value range of the special symbol random number for selecting a part of the generated second component element information Corresponds to the value range belonging to the second loss range of the loss symbol determination value table used in the symbol determination processing,
The main control means, in the starting area monitoring processing, executes a notice effect determination processing for transmitting the symbol notice information to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means,
Receiving the symbol advance notice information, the presence or absence of the execution of the preliminary effect using the received symbol advance notice information, determine the type of the advance effect,
When the special symbol random number is a random number value for determining the second loss at the time of the symbol determination process in the main control means , the specific second determined in the preview effect determination process as the symbol preview information. When the component information is received, the number of types that can be selected as the pre-production is reduced compared to when information other than the specific second component information is received, and the pre-production is performed. 2. The pachinko gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the presence / absence and the type of the preliminary effect are determined.

Images